MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN M/Aq6
Version P631 -305/306/307/308 -403/404/405/406/407/408 -610/611/620/621/622/630 P632 -305/306/307/308 -403/404/405/406/407/408 -610/611/620/621/622/630 P633 -305/306/307/308 -404/405/406/407/408/409/410/411/412 -610/611/620/621/622/630 P634 -305/306/307/308 -403/404/405/406/407/408 -610/611/620/621/622/630
Technical Manual Content P63x/EN M/Ca4 (-610) P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (-611/620) P63x/EN AD/Am6 (-621) P63x/EN AD/An6 (-622) P63x/EN AD/Aq6 (-630)
Volume 2 of 2
MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D) Version P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P632 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620 P633 -306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620 P634 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
Upgrade Documentation
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-3
Contents 1 Overview 5 2 Operation 13 2.1 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (LOC) 13 2.2 Serial Interfaces 15 2.3 Configurable Function Keys (F_KEY) 16 2.4 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (INP) 19 2.5 Measured Data Input (MEASI) 20 2.6 Main Functions of the P63x (MAIN) 21 2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (CBF_1 to CBF_4) 37 2.8 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (DEV01 to DEV03)
(P632, P633 only) 50 2.9 Interlocking Logic (ILOCK)
(P632, P633 only) 65 2.10 Single-Pole Commands (CMD_1)
(P632, P633 only) 67 2.11 Single-Pole Signals (SIG_1)
(P632, P633 only) 68 3 Design 70 3.1 Detachable HMI 70 4 User Interface (HMI) 73 4.1 Display and Keypad 73 4.2 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general) 75 4.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (particularly as control keys)
(P632, P633 only) 77 5 Settings 78 5.1 Parameters 78 6 Information and Control Functions 98 6.1 Operation 98 6.2 Fault and Event Records 106
U-4 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below.
References Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610
Technical Manual P63x/EN M/Ba4 (AFSV.12.09700 D)
Besides the changes carried out with version -620 this detailed upgrade documentation also considers changes carried out with version -611 and therefore replaces the following document:
Released Version Documentation
12.12.2007 P631-306-405/406-611 P632-306-405/406-611 P633-306-407/408/409-611 P634-306-405/406-611
Upgrade documentation P63x/EN AD/Ab5 (AFSV.12.09970 D)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-5
1 Overview
Version Changes
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850 systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.
P631-305-403/404-610-710 P632-305-403/404-610-710 P633-305-404/405/406
-610-710 P634-305-403/404-610-710 Release: 23.06.2006 DIFF Bug fixing:
In versions -606 to -610 inrush signaling from all three measuring systems was suppressed when harmonic blocking in measuring system 1 was triggered. This was not accompanied by tripping.
Nevertheless there was the possibility of an overreaction (tripping) when an inrush condition was not recognized by one measuring system with the operating mode set to "Not phase-selective" and in an other measuring system the second harmonic component reached a value of approximately between 70% and 130% of the fundamental.
FT_DA Bug fixing: The fault data for F T _ D A : F a u l t c u r r . I Y , b p . u . (026 088) were mistakenly calculated on the basis of current IY,a.
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software This version is not released.
P631-305-403/404-610-711 P632-305-403/404-610-711 P633-305-404/405/406
-610-711 P634-305-403/404-610-711 Release: ---
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850 systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.
P631-305-403/404-610-712 P632-305-403/404-610-712 P633-305-404/405/406
-610-712 P634-305-403/404-610-712 Release: 09.10.2006 IEC Bug fixing:
The cause for a break in the client-server communications link after approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes has been removed. GOOSE and GSSE were not affected by this break in the client-server communications link.
Bug fixing: If communication was interrupted during control access via the Ethernet interface using the operating program MiCOM S1, renewed control access was only possible after a warm restart of the protection and control unit.
COMM1 The upgraded communications software 3.18 is now implemented. Various small bugs have been fixed in communication protocols per IEC 60870-5-101 and MODBUS.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
U-6 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Version Changes
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software Note: This version is not released for applications with IEC 61850 systems! Version -610-714 may be used as an alternative.
P631-305-403/404-610-713 P632-305-403/404-610-713 P633-305-404/405/406
-610-713 P634-305-403/404-610-713 Release: 12.12.2006 MAIN Bug fixing:
The sequence of M A I N : G e n e r a l s t a r t i n g (036 000) and D I F F : T r i p s i g n a l (041 075) have been changed such that starting always comes first.
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software
P631-305-403/404-610-714 P632-305-403/404-610-714 P633-305-404/405/406
-610-714 P634-305-403/404-610-714 Release: 07.02.2007
IEC Bug fixing: The cause for a break in the client-server communications link after approximately 49 days for about 20 minutes has been removed. GOOSE and GSSE were not affected by this break in the client-server communications link.
Hardware As an ordering option for the 40TE and 84TE model versions there is now a variant available with a detachable HMI. The detachable HMI is always supplied with a case width of 40TE.
The detachable HMI provides the following new features:
6 freely configurable function keys as well as 6 freely configurable LED indicators (H18 to H23) each situated next to a function key.
The freely configurable LED indicators (H4 to H16 and H18 to H23) are provided as multi-color LEDs.
Note:
When the local control panel is ordered together with a detachable HMI for version -306, it is delivered with function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted. Otherwise the earlier local control panel is delivered without having function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted.
With version -307 and irrelevant of the ordering option, the local control panel is delivered with function keys and multi-colored LED indicators fitted.
P631-306-405/406-611 P632-306-405/406-611 P633-306-407/408/409-611 P634-306-405/406-611
Release: 15.03.2007
P631-307-405/406-611 P632-307-405/406-611 P633-307-407/408/409-611 P634-307-405/406-611
Release: 05.11.2007
Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the interfaces to connect the detachable HMI.
P631.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P631.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P632.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P632.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P633.407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633.408 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633.409 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P634.405 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P634.406 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-7
Version Changes
Software
LOC Because of the ordering option "detachable HMI" this additional Device Identification parameter is now available: L O C : L o c a l H M I exists (221 099).
LOC MAIN
Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default reset functions. These binary input functions are now available in the configuration list for the two newly implemented group resetting functions as well as the extended functional assignment for the CLEAR key ('C'):
M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t 1 (005 248) M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t 2 (005 249) LOC: A s s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y (005 251)
Two menu jump lists may now be configured. These menu jump lists make it possible to select individual menu points (i.e. set values, counters, triggering functions, event logs) in a freely definable sequence.
L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 1 ( 0 3 0 2 3 8 ) L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t 2 ( 0 3 0 2 3 9 )
IEC Implementation of active monitoring of the communications data links to logged-on clients with the parameter I E C : T C P k e e p - a l i v e t i m e r ( 1 0 4 0 6 2 ) . This active monitoring now replaces previous passive monitoring using parameter I E C : I n a c t i v i t y t i m e r ( 1 0 4 0 5 0 ) .
Implementation of an automatic switchover to daylight saving time, activated by parameter I E C : S w i t c h . d a y l . s a v . t i m e (104 219). Switchover times for the automatic switch to daylight saving time are governed by the following settings:
I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t (104 220) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d (104 221) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . m (104 222) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + (104 223) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d (104 225) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d d (104 226) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e e n d m (104 227) I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . e n d 0 : 0 0 + (104 228)
A second SNTP server may now be applied for time synchronization. Should no answer be transmitted by the first SNTP server the next request is automatically transferred to the second SNTP server (backup function).
I E C : S N T P s e r v e r 1 I P ( 1 0 4 2 0 2 ) I E C : S N T P s e r v e r 2 I P ( 1 0 4 2 1 0 )
Instead of setting a router address and target network, so as to establish a communication link to a client situated exterior to the local network, now only the setting of the gateway address is required via I E C : G a t e w a y a d d r e s s (104 011).
Now 'unbuffered reports' are available for all logical nodes.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
U-8 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Version Changes
LED The new detachable HMI provides the following extended display functionalities:
The operating mode for the LED indicators has been extended by the operating mode LED flashing.
Two differing signals may now be assigned to the freely configurable LED indicators (H 4 to H 16 and H 18 to H 23) to emit either red or green light. If both assigned signals are active the resulting LED color will be 'amber' (yellow).
Configuration, operating mode and physical state of the permanently configured LED indicators H1 and H17 are now displayed via configuration parameters and physical state signals.
F_KEY The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys operated either as a key or switch with or without password protection.
CBF_1 ... CBF_3
Implementation of the new circuit breaker failure protection function including a current reset criterion. Depending on the number of ends on the protected object there are up to 4 function groups available.
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software
LOC Bug fixing: Reset functions configured to the CLEAR key ('C') are now carried out correctly. A system restart could previously occur when the detachable HMI was disconnected.
FT_DA Bug fixing: The fault data for differential current and restraining current issued by the ground differential protection functions REF_2 and REF_3 are now also calculated correctly when the operating mode is set to "Low imped. / IP,max" (previously they had twice the value).
REF_1 ...REF_3
When the differential protection is triggered these functions are now blocked as long as at least one of the following conditions is met: D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 1 t r i g g . (041 124) D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 2 t r i g g . (041 125) D I F F : M e a s . s y s t e m 3 t r i g g . (041 126)
CBF_1 ... CBF_3
Timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' of functions CBF_2…CBF_4 are now processed regardless of the setting at CBF_1.
P631-306/307-405/406 -611-715
P632-306/307-405/406 -611-715
P633-306/307-407/408/409 -611-715
P634-306/307-405/406 -611-715
Release: 12.06.2007
IEC The ICD files have been modified. urcbMX has been added to the logical nodes PhsPDIF1, Rf1PDIF1, Rf2PDIF1 and Rf3PDIF2.
Implementation of the communication protocol IEC 61850 in these versions is KEMA certified.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-9
Version Changes
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software
P631-306-405/406-611-716 P632-306-405/406-611-716 P633-306-407/408/409
-611-716 P634-306-405/406-611-716
Release: 31.08.2007 IEC The data model of the measured operating values for differential current
and restraining current in the functions DIFF and REF_n is now implemented according to the data attributes for the standard WYE, ACT and ACD classes.
Note: With this implementation, the "phase" measured values from the DIFF protection functions correspond to the measured values of the three measuring systems: "phSA" = Measuring system 1 "phSB" = Measuring system 2 "phSC" = Measuring system 3
Accordingly the measured values from the REF_n protection functions are modeled as "neut".
ICD and PICS-MICS-ADL files have been upgraded accordingly.
Hardware The binary I/O module X (4H) with four high-break contacts is now available.
With the P632/P633, the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO) for the control of up to three switchgear units is available as an additional option.
Diagram The updated connection diagrams now include the new binary I/O module X (4H) and the binary I/O module X (6xI, 6xO).
P631 -407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P631 -408 (for 40TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P632 -407 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P632 -408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P633 -410 (for 40TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633 -411 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P633 -412 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
P634 -407 (for 84TE case, pin-terminal connection) P634 -408 (for 84TE case, ring-terminal connection)
Software
P631-308-407/408-620 P632-308-407/408-620 P633-308-410/411/412-620 P634-308-407/408-620 Release: 06.06.2008
DVICE The previous parameter D V I C E : O r d e r N o . (000 001)
has been renamed to
D V I C E : A F S O r d e r N o . (001 000).
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
U-10 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Version Changes
LOC The previous parameters L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e s e t k e y (005 251) and L O C : A s s i g n m e n t r e a d k e y (080 110)
have been renamed to L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y (005 251) and L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y (080 110)
without any changes in their functionality.
Now the selection offered for the parameter L O C : L a n g u a g e (003 020)
no longer is between, e.g. German, and English but between Regional language and Reference language. (This will not cause any changes in functionality as the Reference language is US English and the Regional language will depend on the language order option.)
IEC The menu point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) is now available when the communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103 is set.
GOOSE P632, P633 only: Several GOOSE signals have been added as part of the new control functionality. For a detailed listing see sections "Settings / Configuration Parameters" and "Information and Control Functions / Logic State Signals".
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-11
Version Changes
MAIN The following menu points are now available for each parameter subset: M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d a P S x M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d b P S x M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d c P S x M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d d P S x
The following menu point has been renamed: M A I N : D e v i c e o n - l i n e (previously: M A I N : P r o t e c t i o n e n a b l e d )
The following parameters are now available for status signals from external devices (CBx = CB1 to CB4):
M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d
Note: These signal assignment parameters are visible for 4 circuit breakers with P631, P632, P633 and P634. However, they can only be used with the P632 and P633 and only in accordance with the number of CBs supported. In order to configure function keys with control functions the P632 and P633 have the following parameters available which may be assigned to four of the six function keys:
M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y (006 001) M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y (006 002) M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y (006 003) M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y (006 004)
The P632 and P633 now feature the acquisition of debounced binary signals for control functions, and the parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g .
As part of the control functionality the P632 and P633 now feature additional parameters. M A I N : T y p e o f b a y (220 001) M A I N : C u s t o m i z e d b a y t y p e (221 062)
MEASI The result of the temperature measurement may now be also read out as the maximum value since the last reset operation (temperature Tmax).
INP The setting I N P : F i l t e r (010 220) is now available for conformity with standard IEC 60255-22-7, class A.
FT_DA Correction: The wrong internal timing where the parameter F T _ D A : R u n t i m e t o m e a s . (004 199) could take on the value 'Overflow' has been corrected.
THRM1, THRM2
Correction: With the following menu points the step size for temperature values has be reduced from 0.01 to 0.001.
T H R M 1 : O b j e c t t e m p . p . u . 1 (004 205) T H R M 2 : O b j e c t t e m p . p . u . 2 (004 208) T H R M 1 : C o o l a n t t e m p . p . u . 1 (004 206) T H R M 2 : C o o l a n t t e m p . p . u . 2 (004 209)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in Software Version -610 to -620
U-12 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Version Changes
CBF_x The previous parameter C B F _ 1 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C B F (056 007)
has been renamed to C B F _ 1 : F u n c t i o n g r o u p C B F _ 1 (056 007)
without any changes in the functionality.
The following parameters may now not only be set to an explicit time value but also to 'Blocked'.
C B F _ 2 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B (022 227) C B F _ 3 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B (022 240) C B F _ 4 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B (022 254)
The startup criterion has been modified. After a CBF startup the state of the general trip signal or the external trigger signal are now no longer considered. The CBF will then only reset if the current criterion is met (current values to fall below I< with all three phases) or the CB state is open.
DEV01 to DEV03 (P632, P633 only)
New function groups "External Devices xx" (xx = 01, 02, 03) as part of the implementation of control functions.
ILOCK (P632, P633 only)
New function group "Interlocking Logic" as part of the implementation of control functions.
CMD_1 (P632, P633 only)
New function group "Single Pole Commands" as part of the implementation of control functions.
SIG_1 (P632, P633 only)
New function group "Single Pole Signals" as part of the implementation of control functions.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-13
2 Operation
2.1 Configuration of the Measured Value Panels (Function Group LOC)
Function keys on the front panel user interface (HMI)
The new detachable HMI (as of version -611) provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Either a single function, one of the two group resetting functions or one of the two menu jump lists may be assigned to each of these function keys with the setting parameter F _ K e y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2 Function key F1 is only enabled after the associated password, as defined at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 , has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6.
Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Mechanisms' as well as in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.
Note: Each of the 6 keys has an LED indicator situated next to it which is freely configurable, such as the other 12 LED indicators, but independent of the configuration of the function keys (i.e. the function assignment is for red and green light emission).
Selection of the control point (P632, P633)
As of version -620 the function keys available on the units P632 and P633 can also be configured as control keys (e.g. Local/Remote, Device Selection, Device OPEN, Device CLOSE). See figure U-1 and section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys (P632, P633 only)'. Therefore new settings have been added to function group HMI.
Switchgear units can be controlled from a remote location or locally. Switching between local and remote control is achieved using either an appropriately configured function key or an external key switch. The position of this switch is checked via an appropriately configured input (configuration at M A I N : I n p . a s g . L / R k e y s w . )
For further information on the application of a function key to switch the control point from 'Local' to 'Remote' refer to sections 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.
The setting at L O C : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y determines whether the control point is switched (using either the L/R key or the key switch) from 'Local' to 'Remote' control (L↔R) or from 'Local+Remote' to 'Local' control (R&L↔L) and back again.
If only remote control is enabled then there will be a local access blocking. If only local control is enabled then there will be a remote access blocking.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-14 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
12Z6261 A_EN
≥1R1
S1 1
LOC: Rem.acc.block.active[ 221 004 ]
LOC: Loc.acc.block.active[ 221 005 ]
LOC: Local & Remote Control
305 560
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw.[ 221 008 ]
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key
[ 225 208 ]
1: R <-> L2: R & L <-> L
1
2
1
2,3
Local 1
Remote 2
Local & Remote 3
1) Key of the local control panel
m out of n
F_KEY: Fct. assignm. F1 [ 080 112 ]
Selected signal
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Without function
Local/Remote key [006 004]
1)
F1
≥1
&
&&
&0
1
≥1
&
&
&
U-1 Selection of the control point
(The same applies to the other function keys F2 to F6.)
Configuration of the READ key
As with L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x up to 16 functions may also be selected from the same menu jump list at L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y . They are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the "READ" key.
Configuration of the CLEAR key ('C')
Similar to the setting at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x up to 10 reset functions may be selected from a list at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y . These are carried out by pressing the "CLEAR" C key.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-15
2.2 Serial interfaces
2.2.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Groups IEC, GOOSE and GSSE)
2.2.1.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
Control of switchgear units (P632, P633)
Control of switchgear units (external devices) by the P63x can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the device. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. To have clients control switchgear units (external devices) the following operating modes can be set at I E C : D E V c o n t r o l m o d e l :
Control service mode Direct control with enhanced security SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. If, after a selection no control command is issued by the client, the P63x resets this selection after 2 minutes have elapsed.
The switchgear units’ contact positions signalled to the clients are made with the Report Control Blocks of the switchgear units.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-16 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
2.3 Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)
The P63x includes six additional function keys that are freely configurable. Function keys F1 to Fx will only be enabled after the password has been entered at F _ K e y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y x .
As an example the operation of function key F1 is shown in figure U-2. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again. The same is valid for function keys F2 to F6. Exception: If a function key is configured as a control key a password request is only issued when the command "Local/Remote switching" has been assigned to this function key.
Configuration of function keys with a single function
Each function key may be configured with a single function by selecting a logic state signal at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6), but with the exception: L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). This function is triggered by pressing the respective function key on the P63x.
Configuration of the function keys with a group resetting function
Respective binary signal inputs (if previously unavailable) are assigned to all default reset functions. Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two group resetting functions assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x E X T (x: 1 or 2). By pressing the assigned function key all (up to 10) reset actions selected at M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x (x: 1 or 2) are triggered.
Configuration of function keys with menu jump lists
Instead of a single function each function key may have one of the two menu jump lists assigned at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6) by selecting the listing at L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T (x: 1 or 2). The functions of the selected menu jump list are triggered in sequence by repeated pressing of the assigned function key.
Both menu jump lists are assembled at L O C : F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x (x: 1 or 2). Up to 16 functions such as setting parameters, event counters and/or event logs may be selected.
Note: LED indicators including the six positioned directly next to the function keys are configured independently and in this respect there is no relationship to the respective function key configuration.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-17
Configuration of function keys as control keys (P632, P633 only)
Each function key may be configured as a control key by selecting one of the listings at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).
• M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y
• M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y
• M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y
• M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y
These control functions may only be used sensibly if all four of the above commands have been configured thus engaging four of the available six function keys.
Operating mode of the function keys
For each function key the operating mode may be selected at F _ K E Y : O p e r a t i n g m o d e F x (Fx: F1 to F6). Here it is possible to select whether the function key operates as a key or as a switch. In the operating mode 'Key' the selected function is active while the function key is pressed. In the operating mode 'Switch' the selected function is switched on or off every time the function key is pressed. The state of the function keys can be displayed.
Exception: For function keys configured as control keys the operating mode is irrelevant and it is therefore ignored.
Handling keys If backlighting for the LC display is switched off it will automatically light up when a function key or the "READ" key is pressed. The assigned function will only be triggered when the respective key is pressed a second time. This is also valid for the other keys.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-18 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
U-2 Configuration and operating mode of function keys. The assigned function is either a single function or a menu jump list.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-19
2.4 Configuration and Operating Mode of the Binary Inputs (Function Group INP)
Filter function An additional filter function may be enabled in order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs (operating modes 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low", Filt.'). With this function enabled a status change at the binary logic input is only signalled when the input signal remains at a steady signal level during a set number of sampling steps (sampling step size = period / 20). The number of sampling steps is set at parameter I N P : F i l t e r .
12Z6213 A_EN
INP: Fct.assignm.Uxx
[ XXX XXX ]
&
&
Meas. Function
INP: Mode U xxx[ YYY XXX ]
&
0: active "Low"1: active "High"2: active "Low", filt.3: active "High",filt.
Input signal
0
1
2
3
Function 1 EXT
Function 2 EXT
Function 3 EXT
Function n EXT
Function enabled
-Uxxx
INP: Filter
[ 010 220 ]
&
&
&
&
INP: ControlU xxx[ ZZZ ZZZ ]
U-3 Configuration and operating mode of binary signal inputs
(This diagram replaces figure 3-18 in the technical manual for version -610)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-20 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
2.5 Measured Data Input (Function Group MEASI)
2.5.1 Input for Connection of a Resistance Thermometer
The result of a temperature measurement cannot only be read out as a direct measured value (temperature T) or as a normalized value (temperature norm. T), but also as the maximum value since the last reset (temperature Tmax).
For this the following menu points are available:
M E A S I : T e m p e r a t u r e T m a x (maximum temperature value) M E A S I : R e s e t T m a x E X T (reset via a binary signal) M E A S I : R e s e t T m a x U S E R (manual reset)
64Z70H3A_EN
CHECK: PT100 opencircuit[ 098 024 ]
MEASI: PT100faulty[ 040 190 ]
MEASI: Temperature[ 004 133 ]
MEASI: Enabled[ 035 008 ]
PT 100 Analog input
C
+
-
MEASI: Temperaturep.u[ 004 221 ]
MEASI: TemperatureTmax[ 004 233 ]
U-4 Temperature measurement with a resistance thermometer
(This diagram replaces figure 3-24 in the technical manual for version -610)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-21
2.6 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)
2.6.1 Acquisition of Binary Signals for Control - (P632, P633 only)
In the acquisition of signals for control purposes, the functions real time acquisition (time tagging), debouncing and chatter suppression are included as standard. Each of these signals can be assigned to one of three groups and for each of these groups the debouncing time and chatter suppression can be set. Matching of these two parameters achieves the suppression of multiple spurious pickups.
64Z7034A_UK
2
1
MAIN: Chatt.Mon. Time Gr.1
[ 221 201 ]
DEV01: Debounced cl.signal
310 045
3
2
1
3
MAIN: Debounce Time Gr. 1
[ 221 200 ]
MAIN: Change of State Gr.1
[ 221 202 ]
Debouncing & Chatter suppression
Group 1
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
1: Group 1
2: Group 2
3: Group 3
SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT [ 226 004 ]
DEV01: Gr. Assign. Debounc.[ 210 011 ]
SIG_1: Gr.Asg. Debounc.S001[ 226 003 ]
DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]
DEV01: Debounced tr.signal
310 046
SIG_1: Debounced sig. S001
310 044DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ]
U-5 Group assignment and setting of debouncing and chatter suppression, illustrated for group 1
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-22 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Debouncing The first pulse edge of a signal starts a timer stage running for the duration of the set debouncing time. Each pulse edge during the debouncing time re-triggers the timer stage.
If the signal is stable until the set debouncing time elapses, a telegram containing the time tag of the first pulse edge is generated. As an alternative the time tag may be generated after debouncing by setting parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value 'After debounce time'.
After the set debouncing time has elapsed, the state of the signal is checked. If it is the same as prior to the occurrence of the first pulse edge, no telegram is generated.
Time-tagged entries of the first pulse edge are only generated after debounce time has elapsed. If these entries are saved without delay (setting of M A I N : T i m e t a g to the value '1stEdge,OpMem unsort') they are not necessarily saved in chronological order in the operating data memory. If above parameter has been set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem sorted' then all entries are always saved in chronological order in the operating data memory.
U-6 Signal flow with debouncing when time tagging occurs with the 1st pulse edge
(e.g. parameter M A I N : T i m e t a g set to the value '1stEdge,OpMem Unsort' or '1stEdge,OpMem Sorted'.) Example: Set debouncing time: 50 ms s: start e: end
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-23
2.6.2 Selection of the Bay Type - (P632, P633 only)
The P63x is designed to control up to three switchgear units. The Bay type defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
The P63x offers a selection from pre-defined bay types. Should the required bay type be missing from the standard selection then the user can contact the manufacturer of the P63x to request the definition of a customized bay type to download into the P63x. By applying the bay editor from the PC Access Software MiCOM S1 the user can also define new bay types. The number of this additional bay type will then be displayed at M A I N : C u s t o m i z e d b a y t y p e .
Once the user has selected a bay type, the P63x can automatically configure the binary inputs and output relays with function assignments for the control of switchgear units. The assignment of inputs and outputs for an automatic configuration is shown in the List of Bay Types in the Appendix.
12Z51AQB_UK
MAIN: DEVxx is a C.B.
306 044
MAIN: Type of Bay[ 220 001 ]
MAIN: Auto-Assignment I/O
[ 221 065 ]
BB1
Q0
MAIN: Customized Bay Type[ 221 062 ]
U-7 Selection of the bay type
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-24 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
2.6.3 Function Blocks - (P632, P633 only)
By including function blocks in the bay interlock conditions, switching operations can be prevented independent of the switching status at the time, for example, by an external signal "CB drive not ready" or by the trip command from an external protection device.
Binary input signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression or output signals from the programmable logic function can be assigned to the function blocks 1 and 2 by setting a '1 out of n' parameter. The input signal from the function blocks starts a timer stage and after it has elapsed, the signal M A I N : F c t . b l o c k . x a c t i v e is issued.
U-8 Function blocks
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-25
2.6.4 Coupling between Control and Protection for the CB Signals - (P632, P633 only)
Bay type selection defines the external device (DEV01 or DEV02 or ...) that represents the circuit breaker. Coupling between control and protection for the "Closed" position signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d (x = 1 to 4). In the same way coupling between control and protection for the "Open" position signal is made by the setting at M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n (x = 1 to 4). As a result, the CB status signal needs to be assigned to a binary signal input only if this coupling is implemented.
Note: With all unit versions, P631 to P634, these signal assignments are visible for four circuit breakers, but can only be used with P632 and P633 according to the number of supported CBs.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-26 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
64Z7032 A_UK
MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT[ * ]
DEV03: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 131 ]
DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ]
DEV02: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 081 ]
MAIN: Sig. Asg. CB1 Closed
[ * ]
Selected signalMAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT[ * ]
021 020MAIN: Sig. Asg. CB1 Closed
MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT
x: 1
036 051
021 060
x: 2
036 230
021 062
x: 3
036 231
021 064
x: 4
036 232
U-9 Coupling between control and protection for the CB closed signal
64Z7035 A_UK
MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT[ * ]
DEV03: Open Signal EXT [ 210 130 ]
DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]
DEV02: Open Signal EXT [ 210 080 ]
MAIN: Sig. Asg. CBx Open
[ * ]
Selected signalMAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT[ * ]
021 017MAIN: Sig. Asg. CBx Open
MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT
x: 1
031 028
021 061
x: 2
031 046
021 063
x: 3
031 047
021 065
x: 4
031 048
U-10 Coupling between control and protection for the CB open signal
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-27
2.6.5 Multiple Signals - (P632, P633 only)
The multiple signals 1 and 2 are formed by the programmable logic function using OR operators. The programmable logic output to be interpreted as multiple signaling is defined by the configuration of the binary signal input assignment with the corresponding multiple signaling. Both an updated and a stored signal are generated. The stored signal is reset by the following actions:
General reset
Latching reset
The LED indicators have been reset.
A command received through the communication interface.
If the multiple signaling is still present at the time of a reset, the stored signal will follow the updated signal.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-28 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
12Z62FMA_EN
MAIN: Generalreset EXT[ 005 255 ]
MAIN: Mult.sig. 2 active[ 221 053 ]
MAIN: Generalreset USER[ 003 002 ]1: execute
COMM1: Resetmult. sig. 1[ --- --- ]
COMM1: Resetmult. sig. 2[ --- --- ]
MAIN: Reset LED306 020
OUTP: Resetlatching
402 102
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
MAIN: Mult.sig. 2 stored[ 221 055 ]
MAIN: Mult.sig. 1 active[ 221 017 ]
MAIN: Mult.sig. 1 stored[ 221 054 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Inp.asg.mult.sig. 1 [ 221 051 ]
Selected signal
MAIN: Inp.asg.mult.sig. 2 [ 221 052 ]
Selected signal
U-11 Multiple signals
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-29
2.6.6 CB Trip Signal - (P632, P633 only)
The signal M A I N : C B t r i p i n t e r n a l is issued if the following conditions are met simultaneously:
The binary signal input configured for “tripping” is set to a logic value of ' 1 ' or the selected trip command from the P63x is present.
At the binary signal input configured as “CB trip” a logic value of ' 1 ' is present.
The CB trip signal from an external device can also be signaled. For this task, two binary signal inputs need to be configured as 'CB trip enable ext.' and as 'CB trip ext.'.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-30 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
64Z7033 A_UK
DEV03: Switch. Device Open [ 210 136 ]
MAIN: Inp.Asg. CB Trip Ext
[ 021 024 ]
Selected signal
MAIN: CB Tripped [ 221 016 ]Selected signal
Selected signal
Selected signal
MAIN: Inp.Asg.CB Tr.En.Ext
[ 221 050 ]
MAIN: Inp. Asg. CB Trip
[ 221 013 ]
MAIN: Prot.Trip>CB Tripped
[ 221 012 ]
MAIN: Inp.Assign. Tripping
[ 221 010 ]
DEV01: Switch. Device Open [ 210 036 ]
DEV02: Switch. Device Open [ 210 086 ]
MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 1[ 036 071 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Gen. Trip Command 2[ 036 022 ]
0: Disabled
1: Gen. Trip Command 1
2: Gen. Trip Command 2
3: Gen. Trip Command 1/2
0
1
2
3
0 3
U-12 CB trip signal
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-31
2.6.7 Enable for Switch Commands Issued by the Control Functions - (P632, P633 only)
Before a switching unit within the bay is closed or opened by the control functions of the P63x, the P63x first checks whether the switch command may be executed. A switch command will be executed if the optional control enable has been issued and the interlock conditions are met. The interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic for each switching unit within the bay that is subject to control actions and for each control direction (Open/Close). Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock. The check of bay or station interlock equations can be cancelled for all electrically controllable switchgear units within a bay. If the station interlock is active, it may be cancelled selectively for each switching unit and each control direction (see section ‘Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units').
If “Local” has been selected as the control point, the bay and station interlocks may be cancelled through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-32 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
U-13 General enable for switch commands issued by the control functions; activating or cancelling the interlocks
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-33
U-14 Rejection of switching commands
2.6.8 Communication Error - (P632, P633 only)
If a link to the control station cannot be established or if the link is interrupted, the signal 'Communication error' will be issued. This signal will also be issued if communication module A is not fitted.
U-15 Communication error
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-34 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
2.6.9 Resetting Actions
Stored data such as event logs, measured fault data etc, can be cleared in several ways. The following resetting actions (as of version -611) are available:
Automatic resetting of the event signals provided by LED indicators (given that the LED operating mode has been set accordingly) and of the display of measured event data on the front panel LCD whenever a new event occurs. In this case only the displays on the front panel LCD are cleared but not the internal memories such as the fault memory.
Resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel LCD by pressing the "CLEAR" key C located on the front panel user interface (HMI). By selecting the required function at L O C : F c t . r e s e t k e y further memories may be assigned which will then also be cleared when the "CLEAR" key is pressed.
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) via setting parameters. (For this example: Navigate to menu point F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . U S E R and set to 'Execute', see also the exact step-for-step description in section 'Reset'.)
Selective resetting of a particular memory type (e.g. only the fault memory) through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (For this example: Assign parameter F T _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T to the relevant binary signal input e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 .)
Group resetting by setting parameters, by navigating to menu point M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t x U S E R and setting it to 'Execute'. For this the relevant memories (i.e. those to be reset) must be assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .
Group resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (That is assign parameter M A I N : G r o u p r e s e t . x E X T to the relevant binary signal input, e.g. I N P : F c t . a s s i g n m . U 1 2 0 1 after memories to be reset have been assigned to parameter M A I N : F c t . a s s i g n . r e s e t x .)
General resetting by setting parameters (menu point M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t U S E R ). All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options.
General resetting through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. (M A I N : G e n e r a l r e s e t E X T is assigned to the relevant binary signal input.) All memories, counters, events etc. are reset without any special configuration options.
Should several resetting actions have been configured for one particular memory then they all have equal priority.
In the event of a cold restart, namely simultaneous failure of both internal battery and substation auxiliary supply, all stored signals and values will be lost.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-35
Further resetting possibilities are basically not distinct resetting actions but make access especially easy to one of the resetting actions described above i.e. by configuring them to a function key.
Function keys may be configured such that resetting of a specific memory is assigned. Technically this is similar to resetting through an appropriately configured binary signal input. When a function key is pressed a signal to a binary signal input is simulated. (See section 'Configurable Function Keys'.)
Similar to this, but one step less direct, is the possibility to assign one of the two menu jump lists (L O C : T r i g . m e n u j m p x E X T ) to a function key and to include the relevant menu point for a resetting action (e.g. O U T P : R e s e t l a t c h . U S E R ) in the definition (L O C : F c t . F c t . m e n u j m p l i s t x ) of the selected menu jump list.
The same may be achieved with the "READ" key by assigning it a menu point for a resetting action through L O C : F c t . r e a d k e y .
12Z6115 A_EN
MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT[ 065 001 ]
MAIN: Reset indicat. USER[ 021 010 ]
0
1
0: don't execute1: execute
MAIN: General reset USER [ 003 002 ]
0
1
0: don't execute1: execute
1: execute
MAIN: Reset LED306 020
≥1
U-16 General reset, resetting of LED indicators and measured event data displayed on the front panel LCD
(This diagram replaces figure 3-60 in the operating manual for version -610)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-36 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
0
1
0: don't execute1: execute
&
MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT [ * ]
≥1
m out of n
LOC: Fct. reset key [ 005 251 ]
OP_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 213]
m out of n
MAIN: Fct.assign. reset 1 [ * ]
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER [ * ]
MAIN: Fct. assign. reset 1005 248005 249
MAIN: Group reset 1 EXT 005 209005 252
MAIN: Group reset 1 USER005 253005 254
x
12
LOC: Reset key active
310 024 & ≥1OP_RC: Reset record. EXT[ 005 213 ]
12Z61RMB_EN
OP_RC: Reset record. EXT [005 213]
U-17 "CLEAR" key on the front panel HMI and, as an example, group resetting of the operating data recording (e.g. as an example for the reset
signal O P _ R C : R e s e t r e c o r d . E X T ); further examples for resetting signals generated in this way are: − [005 210] MAIN: Reset c. cl/tr.c EXT − [005 211] MAIN: Reset IP,max,st. EXT − [005 240] MT_RC: Reset record. EXT − [005 241] OL_RC: Reset record. EXT − [005 243] FT_RC: Reset record. EXT − [005 255] MAIN: General reset EXT − [006 075] f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT − [006 076] MEASI: Reset Tmax EXT − [035 182] V/f: Reset replica EXT − [036 087] MEASI: Reset output EXT − [039 122] THRM1: Reset replica EXT − [036 158] CTS: Reset latching EXT − [039 182] THRM2: Reset replica EXT − [040 015] OUTP: Reset latch. EXT − [040 138] MAIN: Reset latch.trip EXT − [065 001] MAIN: Reset indicat. EXT
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-37
2.7 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Groups CBF_1 to CBF_4)
As of version P63x -611 the new version of the circuit breaker failure protection function, identical with all Px3x protection devices, has been implemented. Depending on the design version this function group is repeatedly available so that a dedicated function may be applied to each end on the protected object.
P631: CBF_1 and CBF_2 P632: CBF_1 and CBF_2 P633: CBF_1 to CBF_3 P634: CBF_1 to CBF_4
The following specifications apply to assigning these 4 functions to the physical measured current values and the internal logical signals.
Assigning ends The currents to be monitored by the respective CBF function may be selected using setting parameters:
Address Description Range of Values Units
022.156 CBF_1 Select. meas. input
022.157 CBF_2 Select. meas. input
022.158 CBF_3 Select. meas. input
022.162 CBF_4 Select. meas. input
End a End b End c End d Current summation
Assigning CBs Each CBF_x function is permanently assigned to the respective circuit breakers CBx. This concerns monitoring of the CB contact positions in conjunction with the MAIN function of the protection unit. There are no specifications concerning the assignment of circuit breakers to ends on the protected object.
Assigning the trip command
Which of the trip commands is to be used as a start criterion for the respective CBF function may be selected by setting parameter:
Address Description Range of Values Units
022.202 CBF_1 Fct.assign. starting
022.216 CBF_2 Fct.assign. starting
022.230 CBF_3 Fct.assign. starting
022.244 CBF_4 Fct.assign. starting
MAIN Gen. trip signal 1 MAIN Gen. trip signal 2 MAIN Gen. trip signal 3 MAIN Gen. trip signal 4
The functional range made available by the circuit breaker failure protection function CBF_1 is documented in the following description. Function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 provide the same functional range.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-38 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
However, after release of the device software version -611 the following dependencies between functions have been identified:
The following limitation in setting timer stages (bug fixed as of version -620) is present in software versions -611 and -611-71x:
In function groups CBF_2 to CBF_4 the parameter "Delay/fault beh. CB" (addresses 022 227, 022 240 and 022 254) cannot be set to 'Blocked'. It is not possible to completely switch off this sub-function. This does not cause a problem regarding protection functionality as, firstly, the same effect is achieved by setting a timer stage with a delay time of 100 s and, secondly, the signal "Fault behind CB" may be ignored by not using it.
Only with version -611 the following links exist for timer stages 't1 3p' and 't2' (bug fixed as of version -611-716):
Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 3 : t 1 3 p ; C B F _ 4 : t 1 3 p are processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p is set to 'Blocked'.
Timer stages C B F _ 2 : t 2 ; C B F _ 3 : t 2 ; C B F _ 4 : t 2 are processed as 'blocked' if C B F _ 1 : t 2 is set to 'Blocked' .
If these timer stages in CBF_1 are not set to 'Blocked' the timer stages in CBF_2 to CBF_4 will be processed as set. If 'Blocked' has been selected for this setting then a delay time of 655.35 s will become effective.
Note: In the default setting, these timer stages are not set to 'Blocked' so that the above links will have no effect. However, should a timer stage in CBF_1 be set to 'Blocked' and should this function later be disabled and de-configured, then the setting 'Blocked' will remain effective as described above.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-39
Disabling or enabling the CBF function
The activation of the function is enabled at C B F : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R . If this enabling function has been activated, CBF can be disabled or enabled via setting parameters or through appropriately configured binary signal inputs. The front panel HMI and the binary signal inputs have equal priority in this regard. If only the function C B F _ 1 : E n a b l e E X T is assigned to a binary signal input, then CBF will be enabled by a positive edge of the input signal and disabled by a negative edge. If only the parameter C B F _ 1 : D i s a b l e E X T has been assigned to a binary signal input, then a signal at this input will have no effect.
64Z1101 A_EN
U x1
U x2
U x3
U xx
Address 038 042
CBF_1: Enable EXT [ 038 041 ]
CBF_1: DisableEXT[ 038 042 ]
Address 038 041
INP: Fct. assignm. U xxx
[ xxx xxx ]
CBF_1: General enable USER
[ 022 080 ]
0
0: No1: Yes
1
CBF_1: Enable USER
[ 003 016 ]
0: Don't execute1: Execute
CBF_1: Disable USER
[ 003 015 ]
0: Don't execute1: Execute
CBF_1: Ext./user enabled [ 038 040 ]
CBF_1: General enable . [ 040 055 ]
0
1
0
1
U-18 Disabling or enabling circuit breaker failure protection
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-40 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Readiness of circuit breaker protection
Circuit breaker failure protection will not be available should one of the following conditions be met:
The CBF function is not activated.
Circuit breaker protection is being blocked by an appropriately configured binary signal input.
All CBF timer stages have been set to 'Blocked'.
CBF_1: Enabled[ 040 055 ]
CBF_1: Not Ready[ 040 025 ]
CBF_1: Blocking EXT[ 038 058 ]
CBF_1: t2[ 022 166 ]
CBF_1: Delay/Starting Trig.[ 022 155 ]
CBF_1: Delay/Fault Beh. CB[ 022 171 ]
CBF_1: Delay/CB Sync.Superv [ 022 172 ]
CBF_1: t1 3p[ 022 165 ]
64Z1102 B_UK
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
Blocked
&
&
CBF_1: Ready[ 038 009 ]
U-19 CBF readiness
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-41
Detecting a CB tripping A break in current flow is the preferred criterion to detect a successful CB tripping.
Protection functions that have triggering criteria not directly dependent on current flow (e.g. V<>), may additionally be provided with status signals from CB auxiliary contacts for evaluation.
Current flow monitoring This function is used to detect a break in current flow safely, immediately and pole selectively. The CBF function continuously compares sampled current values from the selected end with the set threshold value C B F : I < . As long as current flow criteria are met the phase-selective signals C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w A , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w B , C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w C and the multiple signal C B F _ 1 : C u r r e n t f l o w P h x will be continuously issued.
CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
>1
64Z1103 B_UK
CBF_1: Current Flow A[ 038 230 ]IA
IB
IC
CBF_1: Current Flow B[ 038 231 ]CBF_1: Current Flow C[ 038 232 ]CBF_1: Current Flow Phx[ 038 233 ]
U-20 Current flow monitoring
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-42 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Evaluation of CB status signals
Trip signals included in the general trip command which use status signals provided by the CB auxiliary contacts in addition to current flow monitoring, can be selected with the parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x .
Applying CB status signals depends on the type of auxiliary contacts available. The P63x can check the following CB status signals for plausibility and evaluate them:
The 'Open' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B o p e n 3 p E X T
The 'Closed' signal from the circuit breaker, M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T
Note: Each circuit breaker CBx is permanently assigned to the respective CBF_x functions. P631+P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3; P634: x = 1, 2, 3, 4.
The evaluation of the CB status signals is blocked, if the configuration of the respective binary signal inputs or the signal levels are not plausible. This will result in the P63x issuing the signal C B F : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e . Evaluation of current criteria is not affected by this blocking.
If only one of the two possible CB status signals has been configured, then this configured signal will always be considered plausible by the P63x.
As an alternative the status signals from the external device (as of version -620) may be used by the P632 and P633. (See section 2.6.4 'Coupling between control and protection for the CB signals'.) Assigning necessary for this is carried out with the parameters M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x o p e n or M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B x c l o s e d . Status signals from external devices are processed similar to CB status signals M A I N : C B x o p e n 3 p E X T and M A I N : C B x c l o s e d 3 p E X T . (P632: x = 1, 2; P633: x = 1, 2, 3.)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-43
&
MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT[ * ]
INP: Fct. U xxx Assign
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xxx
Address 031 028
Address 036 051
MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT[ * ]
&
&
&CBF_x: CB Pos. Implausible[ * ]
64Z7031 B_UK
031 028MAIN: CBx Open 3p EXT
MAIN: CBx Closed 3p EXT
x: 1
036 051
031 046
x: 2
036 230
031 047
x: 3
036 231
031 048
x: 4
036 232
CBF_x: CB Pos. Implausible 038 210 043 086 043 116 043 146
U-21 Plausibility check of CB status signals
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-44 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Startup criteria The startup of the circuit breaker failure protection function will occur when the CB is recognized as closed during a start criterion. The following startup criteria are evaluated:
Internal startup criterion: Generating the specific general trip signal, which has been selected by setting parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n . s t a r t i n g , is considered a startup criterion. In addition it may be selected, by setting the parameter C B F _ 1 : S t a r t w i t h m a n . t r i p , that a manual trip signal will also be used as a startup criterion.
External startup criterion: Triggering by a protection device operating in parallel (C B F _ 1 : S t a r t 3 p E X T ) may be used as a startup criterion. To be on the safe side an additional two pole triggering may be implemented by applying the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t e n a b l e E X T .
In any case, current flow monitoring is the preferred (primary) monitoring criterion. The CB auxiliary contacts are only evaluated when no current flow is registered and the respective trip signal, included in the general trip command, has been selected from the protection function in parameter C B F _ 1 : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x for the evaluation of the CB auxiliary contacts.
Note: With the implementation of software version -611 the startup criterion could disappear when the assigned general trip signal or the external startup criterion dropped out. This happened independently of current flow criteria and CB status signal criteria. The startup criterion has been modified as of software version -620. After a CBF startup has occurred the status of the general trip signal or the external startup signal are now no longer considered. Therefore CBF will drop out only when the current criterion (current flow is below I< in all three phases) is met or when the CB status is identified as open.
Timers and tripping logic Associated timer stages are started when a startup criterion is met.
The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 1 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 1 3 p , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a second CB trip coil.
The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l t 2 will be issued if the startup criterion is still present when the time delay, set at timer stage C B F _ 1 : t 2 , has elapsed. The output command from this timer stage is intended for a backup circuit breaker or protection system.
These trip signals will be issued as long as the startup criteria are met.
Should a loss of gas pressure occur in the explosion chambers of installed type SF6 circuit breakers then all surrounding circuit breakers must be immediately tripped without waiting for a reaction from the damaged switch. In case of an external CB_ 1 fault the elapsing of timer stage t2 may be interrupted by a signal to the binary signal input appropriately configured at C B F _ 1 : C B f a u l t y E X T .
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-45
CBF_1: Fct.Assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
m out of nSignal 1Signal 2
Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p[ 031 042 ]
&
>1
1
1
1S
R
&
&
>1
>1
&
&
>1
INP: Fct. U xxx Assign
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xnn
Address 038 209CBF_1: Start Enable EXT [ 038 209 ]CBF_1: Start 3p EXT[ 038 206 ]
CBF_1: Start with Man.Trip
[ 022 154 ]
01
&
MAIN: Man. Aus Signal [ 034 017 ]
& >1&
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked[ 021 013 ]
&
& >1
0: No1: Yes
CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]
IB
IC
>1
INP: Fct.Assign. Starting
[ 022 202 ]
Gen Trip Signal 1
Gen Trip Signal 2
Gen Trip Signal 3
Gen Trip Signal 4
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1[ 036 005 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 2[ 036 023 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 3[ 036 108 ]
&
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 4[ 036 109 ]
&
>1
64Z1104 B_UK U-22 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -611
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-46 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
CBF_1: Fct. Assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
m out of nSignal 1
Signal 2Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible[ 038 210 ]
11
1S
R
INP: Fct. U xxx Assign
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xnn
Address 038 209CBF_1: Start Enable EXT [ 038 209 ]CBF_1: Start 3p EXT[ 038 206 ]
CBF_1: Start with Man.Trip
[ 022 154 ]
0
1
MAIN: Manual Trip Signal [ 034 017 ]
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked[ 021 013 ]
64Z1104 C_UK
0: No1: Yes
CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]
IB
IC
CBF_1: Fct. Assign. Starting
[ 022 202 ]
Gen Trip Signal 1
Gen Trip Signal 2
Gen Trip Signal 3
Gen Trip Signal 4
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 1[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 2[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 3[ 036 108 ]
MAIN: Gen Trip Signal 4[ 036 109 ]
1
1
1S
R
MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT[ 036 051 ]
&
&
&
&
&&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&
&&
U-23 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection in software version -620
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-47
64Z1105 B_UK
C
t 0
CBF_1: Not Ready[ 040 025 ]
CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]
CBF_1: Trip Signal t1[ 038 215 ]
CBF_1: Trip Signal t2[ 038 219 ]
CBF_1: CB Faulty EXT [ 038 234 ]
CBF_1: t1 3p
[ 022 165 ]
C
t 0
CBF_1: t2
[ 022 166 ]
CBF_1: CB Failure[ 036 017 ]&
U-24 Timer stages of the circuit breaker failure protection
Trip commands While trip signals issued by the CB failure protection have no timer stages available the user can set minimum time delays for trip commands.
By appropriate setting it can further be determined that trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection, will operate in latching mode. The respective trip command, set to latch mode, will remain active until reset by operating parameters or through an appropriately configured binary signal input.
CBF_1: Trip Signal t1[ 038 215 ]
CBF_1: Trip Command t1[ 038 220 ]&
MAIN: Latch. Trip c Reset[ 040 139 ]
t 0
CBF_1: Min.Dur. Trip Cmd.t1
[ 022 167 ]
1
1
1S
R
MAIN: Trip Cmd. Blocked[ 021 013 ]
CBF_1: Latching Trip Cmd.t1
[ 022 169 ]
&0
1
0: No1: Yes
>1
>1
CBF_1: Trip Signal t2[ 038 219 ]
CBF_1: Trip Command t2[ 038 224 ]& t 0
CBF_1: Min.Dur. Trip Cmd.t2
[ 022 168 ]
1
1
1S
R
CBF_1: Latching Trip Cmd.t2
[ 022 170 ]
&0
1
0: No1: Yes
>1
>1
64Z1106 B_UK U-25 Trip commands, issued by the CB failure protection
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-48 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Starting trigger Should a downstream CB fail, a trip can be issued by the CB failure protection function. In this case the dedicated general interrogation is checked as a condition so as to guarantee increased security against overreaction.
The signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g will be issued when the signal C B F _ 1 : S t a r t i n g t r i g . E X T is presented to an appropriately configured binary signal input and a general starting is present. The signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p s i g n a l will be issued after timer stage C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / s t a r t i n g t r i g . has elapsed.
tMAIN: General Start[ 036 000 ]
CBF_1: Starting Trig. EXT [ 038 016 ]
CBF_1: Trip Signal[ 040 026 ]
CBF_1: Starting[ 038 021 ]
CBF_1: Delay/Starting Trig.
[ 022 155 ]
0
64Z1107 B_UK
&
U-26 Starting trigger
Fault behind CB protection A fault behind a CB (downstream) is a fault that may occur between a circuit breaker already open and a CT, which is fed from the remote end.
Fault behind CB protection recognizes such faults through the current criterion, if the circuit breaker does not provide a signal from its auxiliary contacts that it is closed after the time delay set at C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / f a u l t b e h . C B has elapsed.
When such a fault behind CB is recognized the signal C B F _ 1 : F a u l t b e h i n d C B is issued. In such a case the far end circuit breaker may be triggered by an InterMiCOM teleprotection interface. This may also prevent an unwanted triggering of the circuit breaker failure function.
64Z1108 C_UK
t 0CBF_1: Fault behind CB[ 038 225 ]
CBF_1: Delay/Fault Beh. CB [ 022 171 ]CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible[ 038 210 ]
MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT[ 036 051 ]
IA
IB
IC
&
&
U-27 Fault behind CB protection
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-49
CB synchronization supervision
CB synchronization supervision recognizes states where not all circuit breaker contacts are open or closed. This function uses both current flow monitoring and evaluation of CB status signals to detect CB synchronization. In order to bridge CB operate times the time delay C B F _ 1 : D e l a y / C B s y n c . s u p e r v can be used. When this time delay has elapsed the signal C B F _ 1 : T r i p S i g C B s y n c . s u p e r is issued. Poles that are recognized as being 'open' will still be signaled.
64Z1109 C_UK
t 0
CBF_1: Delay/CB Sync.Superv[ 022 172 ]
CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
CBF_1: CB Pos. Implausible[ 038 210 ]MAIN: CB1 Open 3p EXT[ 031 028 ]MAIN: CB1 Closed 3p EXT[ 036 051 ]
<3
IA
IB
IC
&
&
&
&
&
CBF_1: TripSig CBsync.Super[ 038 226 ]
CBF_1: CBsync.Superv C Open[ 038 229 ]
CBF_1: CBsync.Superv B Open[ 038 228 ]
CBF_1: CBsync.Superv A Open[ 038 227 ]
U-28 CB synchronization supervision
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-50 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
2.8 Control and Monitoring of Switchgear Units (Function Groups DEV01 to DEV03) – (P632, P633 only)
The P63x is designed to control up to 3 switchgear units. The Bay Panel defines the layout of a bay with its switchgear units.
Defining a bay type With the selection of a Bay type, the following definitions are made:
Manually operated switchgear units with status signals to be processed.
Switchgear units to be controlled and signaled by the P63x.
The bay interlock conditions for the 'Open' / 'Close' command control of the switchgear units, for operation with or without the station interlock function.
When a Bay type is selected, the binary inputs for switchgear status signals and the output relays for control commands are configured automatically if M A I N : A u t o -a s s i g n m e n t I / O is set to 'Yes'. If set to 'No', the user will need to carry out this configuration. The list of Bay types in the Appendix shows which binary inputs and output relays have been assigned signals or commands for control of switchgear units in the case of automatic configuration.
Setting options for the P63x and the different possibilities to integrate a switchgear unit into the functional sequence of the P63x (processing of status signals only or controlling and signaling) will be explained below, using one switchgear unit as an example. Function group DEV01 will be used throughout in this example. If a signal is identified in the function diagrams by function group "C O M M 1 :" with a blank address [--- ---], it will indicate that it is a signal to or from the communication interface and that it has not been assigned an address. Signals listed in the function diagrams as ‘signal 1’ to ‘signal n’ are specified in the configuration tables of the Address List.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-51
2.8.1 Processing Status Signals from a Manually Operated Switchgear Unit (P632, P633 only)
The status signals ‘Open’ and ‘Closed’ are assigned to binary signal inputs. The signals conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section ‘Main Functions of the P63x’) are used for further processing. If no logic value of ' 1 ' is present at any of the two binary signal inputs, the running time monitoring function is started. For the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.
The signal 'Faulty Pos.' is issued if the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their 'Open' or 'Closed' position after the set time delay for running time monitoring and the delay time set in M A I N : D e l a y M a n . O p . S u p e r v . have elapsed. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
Switch truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-52 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
U-29 Processing status signals from a manually operated switchgear unit
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-53
2.8.2 Functional Sequence for Controllable Switchgear Units – (P632, P633 only)
Local or remote control of external devices
Usually, remote control of external devices is carried out via the communication interface and local control via appropriately configured function keys on the front panel HMI. Moreover, switchgear units can be controlled via binary inputs configured appropriately (configuration via D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r l . o p e n or D E V x x : I n p . a s g . e l . c t r . c l o s e ). The setting at M A I N : E l e c t r i c a l c o n t r o l determines whether the inputs function as remote or local control points.
Dependent on the respective position of control the P63x will issue the following logic state signals:
M A I N : C m d . f r . c o m m . i n t e r f
or
M A I N : C o m m a n d f r o m H M I
or
M A I N : C m d . f r . e l e c t r . c t r l
Additionally the following state signals are issued and entered into the operating data memory:
D E V x x : O p e n c m d . r e c e i v e d
D E V x x : C l o s e c m d . r e c e i v e d
Selecting the switchgear unit to be controlled and generating a switching request
The switchgear unit to be controlled is selected and the switching command is sent to this selected switchgear unit. This can be carried out via the front panel HMI using the selection key and pressing the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ key to generate the switching request. (It should be noted that the front panel HMI on the P63x does not feature specific keys for switching functions. If at this point mention of a “selection key” is made, then this would be a function key to which a specific function has been assigned – in this example M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y . (See section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as control keys'.)
For control via binary inputs, the appropriate control inputs need to be configured for switchgear units selected to be controlled. For control via the communication interface, the control commands ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ will also address the switchgear unit to be controlled.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-54 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
12Z62AAA_EN
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf[ 221 101 ]
DEV01: Open cmd. received [ 218 000 ]
DEV01: Close cmd. received [ 218 001 ]
COMM1: Open Command DEV01[ --- --- ]
COMM1: Close Command DEV01[ --- --- ]
DEV01: Latching time elaps.
307 012
DEV01: Latching time runn.
307 011
DEV01: Open request
307 000
DEV01: Close request
307 001
DEV01: End open command
307 002
DEV01: End close command
307 003
MAIN: End command306 028
DEV01: Latching time
[ 210 005 ]
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close
[ 210 020 ]
Selected signal
Selected signal
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open
[ 210 019 ]
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
MAIN: Electrical control [ 221 061 ]2: Local
1: Remote
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol.[ 221 018 ]
LOC: Loc.acc. block.active[ 221 005 ]
LOC: Return t. illum. trg
305 550
LOC:Rem.acc.block.active[ 221 004 ]
DEV01
U-30 Generating a switching request with remote control via the communication interface
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-55
Enabling switching commands
Before a switching command is executed, the P63x checks the interlocking conditions defined in the interlocking logic to determine whether a switching command is permitted or not. Bay interlock conditions for operation with or without the station interlock function can be defined. The assignment of an output relay from the interlocking logic to a switching command determines the interlocking conditions that define, for example, the conditions for the 'Open' command for operation without the station interlock function.
U-31 Assignment of equations of the interlocking logic to the switching commands and enabling of switching commands by the bay interlock
function
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-56 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay interlock for operation with the station interlock function
For the station interlock function conditions to be interrogated, there needs to be a communication link with the substation control level. If the P63x detects a communication error or if there is no communication interface available, there will be an automatic switch to bay interlock without the station interlock function.
If there is to be a check on the bay interlock and the station interlock function, the bay interlock will be checked first. If bay interlocking issues a switching enable, a switching request will be sent to the substation control level. At substation control level, there will then be a check – taking into account the station interlock functions – as to whether switching is permitted or not. If the substation control level also issues an enabling command, the switching operation is carried out provided that the enable from the bay interlock is still present. Optionally, the ‘Open’ or ‘Close’ switching operation can be carried out without checking the station interlock function conditions. In this case, the bay interlock conditions defined for operation without station interlock functions will be considered.
U-32 Enabling of switching commands by the station interlock
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-57
Linking protection commands to switching commands
For circuit breakers, the ‘Open’ command can be linked to the protection trip signals. The 'Close' command can also be linked to the close command of the protection functions. The Bay Panel defines which of the switchgear units are circuit breakers. The trip (open) or close commands of the protection functions are executed directly without a check of the interlocking conditions.
U-33 Linking to the protection commands
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-58 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Issuing switching commands
Dependent on the operating mode (set at D E V x x : O p e r . m o d e c m d . ) set for commands, switching commands are issued for the set timer durations or according to time control.
External termination control If the operating mode time control was selected it is possible to intervene in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts. It will then be necessary to set the P63x at M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . to 'Yes' and binary signal inputs must be configured so they can be connected to the external termination contacts.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-59
63Z70AGA_UK
MAIN: Device On-Line[ 003 030 ]1: No (= off)
DEV01: Open Command[ 210 028 ]
DEV01: Protection trip cmd.
307 013
DEV01: Enable SI Open
307 004
DEV01: Oper. Mode Cmd. [ 210 024 ]
DEV01: Close Command[ 210 029 ]
MAIN: Enable Control [ 221 058 ]
MAIN: Type of Bay [ 221 001 ]
DEV01: Enable BI Open
307 019
DEV01: Open request
307 000
DEV01: Enable SI Close
307 005
DEV01: Enable BI Close
307 020
DEV01: Close request
307 001
DEV01: Protect. close cmd.
307 014
1: Long command
2: Short command
3: Time control
MAIN: Cmd. Dur.Long Cmd. [ 221 230 ]
MAIN: Cmd. Dur. Short Cmd. [ 221 231 ]
1
2
3
U-34 Issuing of switching commands
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-60 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Time control of switching commands
As the switching command ends, running time monitoring for the switchgear unit is started. The P63x expects a status signal – ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ – to be issued by the switchgear unit within the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring. The status signal for the position of the contacts on the switchgear unit is present at appropriately configured binary inputs on the P63x, which can be set to debouncing and chatter suppression mode (see description for Debouncing and Chatter Suppression in section 'Main Functions of the P63x'). For the duration of the set time delay for running time monitoring or until the contacts on the switchgear unit are back to a defined position - either ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ - the signal ‘Intermediate position’ is issued.
If D E V 0 1 : I n t e r m . p o s . s u p p r . is set to 'Yes', the previous switchgear unit status will continue to be signaled while the switchgear unit is in the intermediate position. Once the contacts on the switchgear unit have reached their new position, the updated status is signaled.
If the contacts on the switchgear unit have not reached either their ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position after the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed the signal 'Faulty position' is issued. If D E V 0 1 : S t a t . i n d . i n t e r m . p o s . is set to 'Yes', a delay time of 5 s is started. Once this time delay has elapsed and there is no status signal for the position, the state actually present at the binary inputs will be signaled.
If the operating mode without external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'No’) the switching command is terminated after the set latching time has elapsed, when either the ‘Open’ or ‘Closed’ position status signal is received or the set time delay for running time monitoring has elapsed (see Figure U-30).
If the operating mode with external termination contacts was selected (M A I N : W . e x t . c m d . t e r m i n . i s set to 'Yes’) the switching command is terminated, after the set latching time has elapsed, when a termination command is issued while the set time delay for running time monitoring is active.
Switch truck For switchgear units mounted on switch trucks with switch truck plugs, it is possible to configure a single-pole status signal from the switch truck plug. If such a configuration has been assigned, the status signal for the position of the associated switchgear unit is set to ‘Open’ while the input has a logic value of ' 1 '.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-61
12Z51AKB_UK
Debouncing &
Chatter suppression
0: Intermediate pos.1: Open2: Closed3: Faulty position
Selected signal
Signal 1
Signal 2
Signal 3
Signal n
Disabled
DEV01: Closed Signal EXT [ 210 031 ]
DEV01: Gr. Assign. Debounc.
[ 210 011 ]
DEV01: Open Signal EXT [ 210 030 ]
DEV01: Open Command [ 210 028 ]DEV01: Close Command[ 210 029 ]
DEV01: Start runn.time mon.
307 008
DEV01: Inp.Asg. Sw.Tr. Plug
[ 210 014 ]
DEV01: Interm. Pos. Suppr.[ 210 012 ]
0: No
1: Yes
Selected group
0: No1: Yes
0
1
0
1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
R1
S1 1
DEV01: Op.Time Switch. Dev.[ 210 004 ]
DEV01: Stat.Ind.Interm.Pos.
[ 210 027 ]
DEV01: Switch. Device Open[ 210 036 ]
DEV01: Switch.Device Closed[ 210 037 ]
DEV01: Dev. Interm./Flt.Pos[ 210 038 ]
0
1
2
3
0 ... 3
DEV01: End Open Command
307 002
DEV01: End Close Command
307 003
DEV01: Switch. Device runn.
307 010
DEV01: Control State [ 210 018 ]
C
U-35 Monitoring of switching commands
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-62 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Time monitoring without external run-back of command,example for switching operation close
1
3
4
210 036
DEV01: Switch.device open
210 037
DEV01: Switch.device closed
1
3
4
10 ms
DEV01: Latching time
DEV01: Op.time switch. dev.
210 005
210 004
19Z5201A_EN
DEV01: Close command 210 029
U-36 Sequence for time control of switching commands without external termination control
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-63
Time monitoring with externalrun-back of command,example for switching operation close
1
3
10 ms
DEV01: Latching time 210 005
19Z5202A_EN
DEV01:Inp.asg. end Close
210 016
1
3
210 036
DEV01: Switch.device open
210 037
DEV01: Switch.device closed
DEV01: Close command210 029
U-37 Sequence for time control of switching commands with external termination control
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-64 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Monitoring the number of CB operations permitted
The maximum number of CB operations within a specific time delay may be set with parameter M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . Associated with this parameter is the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . to which the maximum number of CB operations permitted is assigned as soon as the positive edge of an event is present that has been selected by a '1 out of n' parameter at M A I N : C B 1 r e a d y f c t . a s s i g n .
The number of CB operations permitted, set with the counter at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p . are then decremented by 1 with each CB operation. Operation of the CB is recognized from the contact position signals D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n and D E V x x : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d .
The counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . may only be decremented to a value of 1. Reaching a value of 1 will in no way effect the protection or control functionality, in particular there will be no blocking of CB operation! When a CB fault has occurred (i.e. M A I N : C B 1 f a u l t y E X T is set to 'Yes') the counter M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . is immediately set to 1.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-65
2.9 Interlocking Logic (Function group ILOCK) - (P632, P633 only)
Commands issued to electrically controllable switchgear units within the bay are only enabled after a check of the interlock conditions has been carried out. Interlock conditions are defined in the interlocking logic by Boolean equations.
With the selection of a bay type the bay interlock conditions are defined automatically for the 'Open' and 'Close' commands to control switchgear units within the bay. Different conditions are defined for the bay interlock equations to operate with or without station interlock (see 'List of Bay Types' in the Appendix). These interlock conditions, defined automatically with the selection of a bay type, can always be modified to system requirements by the user. The following signals acquired by the P63x can be logically linked for the bay interlock.
Function blocks 1 and 2
The output signals from the programmable logic function
The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from switchgear units
The status signals, conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression, from single-pole signals
A maximum of 32 equations, each with 32 equation elements, are available to define the interlock conditions. The Boolean equations need to be defined without the use of brackets. The following rule applies to the operators: ‘NOT’ before ‘AND’ before ‘OR’. The output signal of an equation can be fed into a further, higher ordinal number equation as an input signal thus leading to a set of interlinked Boolean equations.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-66 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
U-38 Interlock logic shown in the example for equation 1
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-67
2.10 Single-Pole Commands (Function Group CMD_1) - (P632, P633 only)
Commands may be transmitted to the P63x via the communications interface. When the P63x receives such a command, and the remote control mode is enabled, an appropriately configured output relay will be triggered and a signal will be issued.
The operating mode may be selected individually for each single-pole command. The following operating mode settings are available:
Long Command
Short Command
Persistent Command
If the operating mode 'long' or 'short' command has been selected the output relay will be triggered for the time delay set at M A I N : C m d . d u r . l o n g c m d . or M A I N : C m d . d u r . s h o r t c m d .
The setting possibilities and the functional sequence is displayed in the example for Command C001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole commands.
U-39 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Command C001
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-68 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
2.11 Single-Pole Signals (Function Group SIG_1) - (P632, P633 only)
Binary single-pole signals issued by the system and presented to appropriately configured binary inputs can be transmitted by the P63x to the control station.
A binary input signal is conditioned by debouncing and chatter suppression (see section ‘Main Functions of the P63x’). Such a conditioned signal is available as a logic signal at S I G _ 1 : L o g i c s i g n a l S x x x .
The signaling behavior over the communication interface is defined by the setting of the operating mode. The following operating mode settings are available:
Without Function
Start/End Signal
Transient Signal
If 'Without function' has been set then no message will be sent when the state at the binary signal input changes. If 'Start/End Signal' has been set then a message will be sent any time the state at the binary signal input changes. The 'Start Signal' must remain at logic ' 1 ' for the set minimum time in order to be accepted and sent with the message. If 'Transient Signal' has been set then messages will only be sent when the state at the binary signal input changes from logic ' 0 ' to logic ' 1 '
The following diagram shows setting options and the functional sequence in the example for Signal S001. This will apply accordingly to all other single-pole signals.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 DE /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-69
U-40 Functional sequence for single-pole commands in the example for Signal S001
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-70 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
3 Design
3.1 Detachable HMI
Application As a further option in the model versions P631 to P634 there is now (as of version -611) a variant available that includes a detachable HMI. This variant is especially designed for applications where protection and control units are directly installed into bay panels situated in medium-voltage substations and, because of structural constraints, there is only limited space available. The detachable HMI with its small dimensions may be fitted here in a convenient spot and at an ergonomic height.
Detachable HMI Configuration and operation of the protection and control unit is carried out from the integrated front panel user interface (HMI) or via the PC interface on the detachable HMI which is designed in 40TE width. To connect the detachable HMI to the protection and control unit, standard RJ45 cables (Ethernet cable, length max. 10 m) may be used. A 3 m standard RJ45 Ethernet cable is included with the shipment.
A connection to the detachable HMI may be established or separated at any time as the detachable HMI is recognized automatically and completely.
Basic unit For the detachable HMI option, the basic unit is available with case widths of 40TE or 84TE in either a flush-mounted or a surface-mounted case and is provided in several variants for an effortless adaptation to meet local operating conditions. The front plate includes 4 LED indicators for display purposes as well as the RJ45 interface to connect the detachable HMI.
Operation without the detachable HMI
The function of the protection and control unit is fully guaranteed even when the detachable HMI is not connected or the communication link between detachable HMI and the basic unit is interrupted. In such a case the basic unit is accessed via its PC interface. The function parameters for the front panel user interface (HMI) and for LED indicators, available only on the detachable HMI, are automatically hidden in this event.
LED indicators on the detachable HMI
The freely configurable LED indicators H4 to H16 on the detachable HMI offer multi-color function assignment. Separate function assignments for the red and the green LED color indications are available. When both the red and the green LED indicators are simultaneously active the resulting color will be amber (yellow).
Function keys on the detachable HMI
The new detachable HMI provides 6 freely configurable function keys. Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-71
12Z61TDA U-41 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case – front view.
12Z61ABA U-42 Basic unit with flush-mounted 40TE case and detachable HMI – front view
The detachable HMI on the basic unit with 84TE case also has a width of 40TE.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-72 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
49Z6202A
U-43 Detachable HMI – rear view
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6-S // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-73
4 User Interface (HMI)
4.1 Display and Keypad
Display and Keypad The front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with an LCD display containing 4 x 20 alphanumeric characters.
Then there are seven keys with permanently assigned functions situated below the LCD and, with 40TE case (P631, P632, P633) and 84TE case (P632, P633, P634) devices, there are (as of version -611) six additional freely configurable function keys situated to the right of the LCD.
Furthermore the front panel user interface (HMI) is fitted with 17 LED indicators, mounted vertically to the left of the LCD and there are six additional LED indicators situated to the right of the six freely configurable function keys.
Further information on the function keys and their application can be found in section 'Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)' and section 'Resetting Actions' as well as in this chapter in section 4.2 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and section 4.3 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'
12 Z6100B_EN
H4H3H2H1H17H5H6H7H8H9H10H11H12H13H14H15H16
G
GG
G
G
G
TRIPALARMOUT OF SERVICEHEALTHYEDIT MODE
G
C
F1
F2
F3
F4
F5
F6
H18
H19
H20
H21
H22
H23
U-44 View of the front panel HMI
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-74 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Availability of the bay panel Only the protection units P632 and P633 provide bay panels under the following conditions:
1. On the hardware side the protection unit has to have been upgraded with a control functionality. This requires that the optional binary I/O module to control switchgear units has been ordered and is fitted to a slot.
2. A further condition is that the protection units are fitted with a communication module with selectable communication protocol or the Ethernet module as well as with the new front panel user interface (HMI) that includes function keys.
3. A bay type has been selected with parameter M A I N : T y p e o f b a y .
Bay panels If available the bay panel will display switching state signals from external devices (closed, open, intermediate position) and the active control site (local or remote). The text display will show up to 3 external devices, one per line, where the external device selected is marked with the flashing ">" symbol to the left of the external devices’ designation text.
X0 :Interm. pos.>Q0 :Interm. pos. Q8 :Interm. pos.Local Locked
U-45 Example of a bay panel
The sequence for external devices is downwards in columns according to their numbering (DEV01, DEV02, DEV03). To designate these external devices there are up to four characters available, and next to these, separated by a colon, their current state is displayed ('Interm. pos.', 'Open', 'Closed' or 'Faulty pos.').
The active control unit ('Remote' or 'Local') is displayed in the fourth line and whether it is 'Locked' or 'Unlocked'.
Keys In addition to the keys documented in the operating manual there are now (as of version -611) six freely configurable function keys available:
Function keys F1 to F6 By pressing a function key the assigned function is triggered. More details on assigning functions to function keys can be found in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)". More details on handling function keys can be found in this chapter, in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)' and in section 'Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx particularly as control keys'.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-75
4.2 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx (general)
Function keys available as of version -611
If they have not been configured as control keys, function keys F1 to Fx are enabled only after the password for function keys has been entered.
Exception: If a function key has been configured at M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y the function will only switch from 'Remote' to 'Local' control after the password has been entered, but switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the password (see also section 4.3).
It is assumed for the remainder of this section that the function key F1 is enabled only after the password (as assigned at F _ K E Y : P a s s w o r d f u n c t . k e y 1 ) has been entered. After the password has been entered the function key will remain active for the time period set at F _ K E Y : R e t u r n t i m e f c t . k e y s . Thereafter, the function key is disabled until the password is entered again.
For this example it is further assumed that the password for the function keys is the factory-set password. If the user has changed the password (see the chapter entitled "Changing the Password"), the following description will apply accordingly.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-76 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Control Step / Description Control Action
Display
0 Example of a display.
Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 ACurr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A
1 Function key F1 is pressed. Eight asterisks (*) appear in the fourth line as a prompt to enter the password.
F1
********
2a Press the following keys in sequence: 'Left'
G
G
*
'Down'
G
G
*
'Right' G
G
*
'Up’ The display will change as shown in the column on the right.
G
G
*
Now press the ENTER key.
If the correct password has been entered, the active display will re-appear.
Function key F1 is now active for the set return time. (Each function key is protected by its own password, and the return time elapses individually for each function key after the correct password has been entered!
If an invalid password has been entered, the display shown above in Step 1 will appear.
Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 ACurr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A
2b This control step can be cancelled at any time by pressing the CLEAR key before the ENTER key is pressed.
C Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 ACurr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A
3 Press F1 again. The function configured to this function key is carried out.
F1 Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 ACurr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A
4 When function keys are pressed while the return time period of the function key is elapsing, then the configured function is carried out directly, e.g. without again checking for the password.
Fx Curr. IP,max,a prim. 75 ACurr. IP,max,b prim. 750 A
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-77
4.3 Configurable Function Keys F1 to Fx, particularly as Control Keys (P632, P633 only)
Function keys as control keys, as of version -620
As described in section "Configurable Function Keys (Function Group F_KEY)" in Chapter 3 function keys F1 to Fx may be configured as control keys at F _ K E Y : F c t . a s s i g n m . F x (Fx: F1 to F6).
In this case different rules apply to checking the password (see the previous section) and the configuration to 'Key/Switch' is ignored.
In case the control functionality is desired then each of the following four control commands, should be assigned to a function key. The particular selection of the four function keys out of the available six, however, does not matter.
• M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y The 'Local/Remote' control command is effective only in the bay panel except where a binary signal input has been configured for this function. Depending on the functionality set at H M I : F c t . A s s i g n . L / R k e y , the 'Local/Remote' command toggles either between 'Remote' and 'Local' control, or between 'Local/Remote' and 'Local' control. (The parameter H M I : F c t . a s s i g n . L / R k e y may be set either to R <-> L or to R & L <-> L and will then define which of the two switching modes is active.) If the 'Local/Remote' command is configured such that it will switch from 'Remote' control to 'Local' control, then this can only occur if the password has first been entered at H M I : P a s s w o r d L / R . Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control will occur without checking the password. (See also section "Configuring the Measured Value Panels and Selection of the Control Point (Function Group HMI)".)
• M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y This selection command is effective only in the bay panel and only if 'Local' control is activated. If local control has been selected, pressing the selection key selects the switchgear unit to be controlled. This selected external device is marked on the text display with the flashing symbol ">" in front of the external devices’ designation text.
• M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y The 'OPEN' command is effective in the bay panel only. Pressing the key assigned to this function controls the selected switchgear unit – taking into account the interlock equation – to assume the 'open' status.
• M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y The CLOSE command is effective in the bay panel only.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-78 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
5 Settings
5.1 Parameters
5.1.1 Device Identification
Device DVICE: AFS Order No. 001 000
Order number for the device. This number cannot be altered by the user.
5.1.2 Configuration Parameters
User interface LOC: Password L/R 221 040
The password used to change the setting from 'Remote' to 'Local' control can be defined here. (Switching from 'Local' to 'Remote' control occurs without checking the password.)
LOC: Display L/R 221 070
This setting defines whether the control site – 'Local' or 'Remote' – shall be displayed on the bay panel.
LOC: Displ. interl. stat. 221 071
This setting defines whether the 'Locked' or 'Unlocked' status shall be displayed on the bay panel.
LOC: Fct. assign. L/R key 225 208
This setting defines whether the (electric) key-operated switch switches between remote / local control (L↔R) or between 'Remote' and 'Local' control / 'Local' control (R&L↔L).
LOC: Return time select. 221 030
If the user does not press a key on the front panel user interface (HMI) during this set time period, then the selection of a switchgear unit is cancelled.
Communication interface 1 COMM1: -103 prot. variant 003 178
The user may select either the AREVA D or the VDEW variant of the 103 protocol. Note: This setting is hidden unless the IEC 870-5-xxx protocol is enabled.
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Update Measurements 104 229
Time period between two transmissions of all measured value Report Control Blocks (RCB) except the measured value for energy.
IEC: Dead band IP 104 230
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the IP measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I P
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-79
IEC: Dead band IN 104 231
Setting to calculate the filter value for all IN Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the IN measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d I N
IEC: Dead band VPP 104 232
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPP Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the VPP measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d V P P
IEC: Dead band VPG 104 233
Setting to calculate the filter value for all VPG Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the VPG measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : Dead band VPG
IEC: Dead band f 104 234
Setting to calculate the filter value for all f Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the f measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d f
IEC: Dead band P 104 235
Setting to calculate the filter value for all P Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the P measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d P
IEC: Dead band phi 104 236
Setting to calculate the filter value for all φ Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the φ measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d p h i
IEC: Dead band Z 104 237
Setting to calculate the filter value for all Z Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the Z measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d Z
IEC: Dead band min/max 104 238
Setting to calculate the filter value for all min/max Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the min/max measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d m i n / m a x
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-80 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
IEC: Dead band ASC 104 239
Setting to calculate the filter value for all ASC Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the ASC measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C
IEC: Dead band temp. 104 240
Setting to calculate the filter value for all temperature Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the temperature measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d t e m p .
IEC: Dead band 20mA 104 241
Setting to calculate the filter value for all 20mA Report Control Blocks (RCB). Should a change occur in one of the 20mA measured values, which is greater than the filter value, the RCB is again sent to all clients. The filter value for each measured value is calculated according to this formula: step size measured value • s e t t i n g I E C : D e a d b a n d 2 0 m A
IEC: DEV control model 221 081
Setting of which control model is to be used to control all external devices. Suggested setting when performing switching operations at maximum safety is SBO enh. Security (SBO = Select-Before-Operate).
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-81
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Applic. ID 108 000 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Applic. ID 108 010
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Applic. ID 108 020
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Applic. ID 108 030
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Applic. ID 108 040
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Applic. ID 108 050
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Applic. ID 108 060
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Applic. ID 108 070
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Applic. ID 108 080
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Applic. ID 108 090
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Applic. ID 108 100
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Applic. ID 108 110
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Applic. ID 108 120
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Applic. ID 108 130
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Applic. ID 108 140
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Applic. ID 108 150
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Applic. ID 110 000
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Applic. ID 110 010
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Applic. ID 110 020
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Applic. ID 110 030
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Applic. ID 110 040
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Applic. ID 110 050
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Applic. ID 110 060
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Applic. ID 110 070
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Applic. ID 110 080
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Applic. ID 110 090
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Applic. ID 110 100
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Applic. ID 110 110
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Applic. ID 110 120
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Applic. ID 110 130
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Applic. ID 110 140
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Applic. ID 110 150
Application ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 Goose ID 108 001
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 Goose ID 108 011
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 Goose ID 108 021
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 Goose ID 108 031
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 Goose ID 108 041
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 Goose ID 108 051
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 Goose ID 108 061
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 Goose ID 108 071
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 Goose ID 108 081
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 Goose ID 108 091
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 Goose ID 108 101
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 Goose ID 108 111
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 Goose ID 108 121
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 Goose ID 108 131
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 Goose ID 108 141
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 Goose ID 108 151
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 Goose ID 110 001
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-82 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 Goose ID 110 011
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 Goose ID 110 021
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 Goose ID 110 031
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 Goose ID 110 041
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 Goose ID 110 051
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 Goose ID 110 061
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 Goose ID 110 071
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 Goose ID 110 081
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 Goose ID 110 091
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 Goose ID 110 101
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 Goose ID 110 111
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 Goose ID 110 121
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 Goose ID 110 131
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 Goose ID 110 141
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 Goose ID 110 151
Goose ID for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. Virtual GOOSE inputs can be linked with interlocking equations of assigned external devices.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataSetRef 108 002
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataSetRef 108 012
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataSetRef 108 022
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataSetRef 108 032
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataSetRef 108 042
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataSetRef 108 052
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataSetRef 108 062
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataSetRef 108 072
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataSetRef 108 082
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataSetRef 108 092
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataSetRef 108 102
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataSetRef 108 112
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataSetRef 108 122
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataSetRef 108 132
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataSetRef 108 142
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataSetRef 108 152
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataSetRef 110 002
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataSetRef 110 012
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataSetRef 110 022
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataSetRef 110 032
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataSetRef 110 042
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataSetRef 110 052
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataSetRef 110 062
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataSetRef 110 072
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataSetRef 110 082
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataSetRef 110 092
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataSetRef 110 102
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataSetRef 110 112
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataSetRef 110 122
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataSetRef 110 132
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-83
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataSetRef 110 142
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataSetRef 110 152
'Dataset Reference' for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A 'Dataset Reference' consists of a chain of characters including the full path of the state value from the device (IED) situated on the opposite side with the logical device/logical node/data object/data attribute. If a path is made up of more than 20 characters, then only the first 20 characters are to be entered.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DataObjInd 108 003
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DataObjInd 108 013
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DataObjInd 108 023
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DataObjInd 108 033
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DataObjInd 108 043
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DataObjInd 108 053
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DataObjInd 108 063
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DataObjInd 108 073
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DataObjInd 108 083
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DataObjInd 108 093
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DataObjInd 108 103
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DataObjInd 108 113
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DataObjInd 108 123
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DataObjInd 108 133
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DataObjInd 108 143
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DataObjInd 108 153
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DataObjInd 110 003
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DataObjInd 110 013
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DataObjInd 110 023
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DataObjInd 110 033
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DataObjInd 110 043
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DataObjInd 110 053
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DataObjInd 110 063
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DataObjInd 110 073
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DataObjInd 110 083
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DataObjInd 110 093
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DataObjInd 110 103
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DataObjInd 110 113
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DataObjInd 110 123
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DataObjInd 110 133
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DataObjInd 110 143
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DataObjInd 110 153
Data object index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data object element in the Dataset is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 DatAttrInd 108 004
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 DatAttrInd 108 014
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 DatAttrInd 108 024
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 DatAttrInd 108 034
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 DatAttrInd 108 044
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 DatAttrInd 108 054
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 DatAttrInd 108 064
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-84 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 DatAttrInd 108 074
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 DatAttrInd 108 084
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 DatAttrInd 108 094
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 DatAttrInd 108 104
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 DatAttrInd 108 114
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 DatAttrInd 108 124
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 DatAttrInd 108 134
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 DatAttrInd 108 144
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 DatAttrInd 108 154
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 DatAttrInd 110 004
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 DatAttrInd 110 014
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 DatAttrInd 110 024
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 DatAttrInd 110 034
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 DatAttrInd 110 044
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 DatAttrInd 110 054
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 DatAttrInd 110 064
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 DatAttrInd 110 074
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 DatAttrInd 110 084
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 DatAttrInd 110 094
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 DatAttrInd 110 104
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 DatAttrInd 110 114
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 DatAttrInd 110 124
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 DatAttrInd 110 134
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 DatAttrInd 110 144
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 DatAttrInd 110 154
Data attribute index of a Dataset for GOOSE, which is to be received by this device (IED) for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. A data object index indicates which data attribute element in the data object is to be evaluated.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 default 108 005
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 default 108 015
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 default 108 025
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 default 108 035
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 default 108 045
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 default 108 055
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 default 108 065
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 default 108 075
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 default 108 085
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 default 108 095
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 default 108 105
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 default 108 115
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 default 108 125
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 default 108 135
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 default 108 145
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 default 108 155
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 default 110 005
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 default 110 015
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 default 110 025
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 default 110 035
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 default 110 045
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 default 110 055
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 default 110 065
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-85
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 default 110 075
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 default 110 085
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 default 110 095
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 default 110 105
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 default 110 115
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 default 110 125
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 default 110 135
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 default 110 145
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 default 110 155
Default for the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device. The state of a virtual two-pole GOOSE input will revert to default as soon as the continuously monitored communication link to a GOOSE sending device (IED situated on the opposite side) is in fault or has disappeared altogether.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-86 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Binary input INP: Filter 010 220 Fig. 3-23
Input filter which is activated when either the mode 'Active "High", Filt.' or 'Active "Low", Filt.' has been selected. In order to suppress transient interference peaks at the logic signal inputs it is suggested to set this parameter to 6 [steps]. See Chapter 'Operation' for further information.
Main function MAIN: Type of bay 220 001
Configuration of a bay type.
MAIN: Customized bay type 221 062
If a user-specific (customized) bay type has been loaded, its bay type number will be displayed. If no customized bay type has been loaded, the number ' 0 ' will be displayed.
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Function group DEV01 210 047
DEV02: Function group DEV02 210 097
DEV03: Function group DEV03 210 147
Cancelling function groups DEV01 to DEV03 or including them in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
DEV01: Funct. type, signal 210 034
DEV02: Funct. type, signal 210 084
DEV03: Funct. type, signal 210 134
Setting the function type of the signal. Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
DEV01: Inform. No., signal 210 035
DEV02: Inform. No., signal 210 085
DEV03: Inform. No., signal 210 135
Setting the information number of the signal. Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.
DEV01: Funct. type, command 210 032
DEV02: Funct. type, command 210 082
DEV03: Funct. type, command 210 132
Setting the function type of the command. Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'low address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN2.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-87
DEV01: Inform. No., command 210 033
DEV02: Inform. No., command 210 083
DEV03: Inform. No., command 210 133
Setting the information number of the command. Note:
If the IEC 870-5-101 communication protocol has been set, then the 'high address' of the information object will be defined by this setting. If the ILS-C protocol has been set, then this setting will correspond to DN3.
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Function group ILOCK 250 102
Cancelling function group ILOCK or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Function group CMD_1 249 252
Cancelling function group CMD_1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
CMD_1: Command C001 config. 200 004
CMD_1: Command C002 config. 200 009
CMD_1: Command C003 config. 200 014
CMD_1: Command C004 config. 200 019
CMD_1: Command C005 config. 200 024
CMD_1: Command C006 config. 200 029
CMD_1: Command C007 config. 200 034
CMD_1: Command C008 config. 200 039
CMD_1: Command C009 config. 200 044
CMD_1: Command C010 config. 200 049
CMD_1: Command C011 config. 200 054
CMD_1: Command C012 config. 200 059
Cancelling commands C001 to C026 or including them in the configuration. If any command is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden, with the exception of this setting.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-88 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Function group SIG_1 249 250
Cancelling function group SIG_1 or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
SIG_1: Signal S001 config. 226 007
SIG_1: Signal S002 config. 226 015
SIG_1: Signal S003 config. 226 023
SIG_1: Signal S004 config. 226 031
SIG_1: Signal S005 config. 226 039
SIG_1: Signal S006 config. 226 047
SIG_1: Signal S007 config. 226 055
SIG_1: Signal S008 config. 226 063
SIG_1: Signal S009 config. 226 071
SIG_1: Signal S010 config. 226 079
SIG_1: Signal S011 config. 226 087
SIG_1: Signal S012 config. 226 095
Cancelling signals S001 to S012 or including them in the configuration. If any signal is cancelled, then all associated settings and signals are hidden..
5.1.3 Function Settings
5.1.3.1 Global
Main function MAIN: Time tag 221 098
For bay control function signals detected via binary signal inputs and conditioned with debouncing it is now possible to select whether the time tag for the signal is to be issued after debouncing or when the first pulse edge is detected. Furthermore it is defined whether entries in the operating data memory are made in chronological order or not.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 open 021 017
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 open 021 061
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 open 021 063
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 open 021 065
Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB open' position signal.
MAIN: Inp.asg. ctrl.enabl. 221 057
Definition of the binary signal used to issue a general command output enable.
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 1 221 200
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 2 221 203
MAIN: Debounce time gr. 3 221 206
Setting the debouncing time.
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.1 221 201
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.2 221 204
MAIN: Chatt.mon. time gr.3 221 207
Setting the chatter monitoring time.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-89
MAIN: Change of state gr.1 221 202
MAIN: Change of state gr.2 221 205
MAIN: Change of state gr.3 221 208
Setting the number of signal changes allowed during the chatter monitoring time before chatter suppression operates.
MAIN: Cmd. dur.long cmd. 221 230
Setting the command duration for a long command.
MAIN: Cmd. dur. short cmd. 221 231
Setting the command duration for a short command.
MAIN: Inp.asg.interl.deact 221 007
Definition of the binary signal used to deactivate interlocking of control commands for switchgear.
MAIN: Inp.asg. L/R key sw. 221 008
Definition of the binary signal used to switch from remote control to local control.
MAIN: Auto-assignment I/O 221 065
When a bay type is selected the binary inputs and outputs, required to control switchgear, are automatically configured with function assignments.
MAIN: Electrical control 221 061
This setting determines whether the binary inputs, that are configured to control switchgear, will be active with remote control or local control
MAIN: Delay Man.Op.Superv. 221 079
After the delay time period, to be set in this window, has elapsed (with the signal "Sw. dev. interm. pos." already present and the status signal continuously absent), the actual switchgear status signal, as obtained from the respective binary inputs, will be issued. (See also "Processing status signals from manually operated switchgear")
MAIN: W. ext. cmd. termin. 221 063
This setting defines whether there is an intervention in the control process of external switchgear units by using external termination contacts.
MAIN: Inp.assign. tripping 221 010
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the tripping of an external protection device. This signal is used to form the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Prot.trip>CB tripped 221 012
Selection of the protection function trip command that will be used to form the CB trip signal.
MAIN: Inp. asg. CB trip 221 013
Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to signal the 'CB open' position signal.
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB1 closed 021 020
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB2 closed 021 060
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB3 closed 021 062
MAIN: Sig. asg. CB4 closed 021 064
Definition of the binary signal used by the P63x to evaluate the 'CB closed' position signal.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-90 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
MAIN: Inp.asg.CB tr.en.ext 221 050
Definition of the binary signal used to enable the CB trip signal of an external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. CB trip ext 221 024
Definition of the binary signal used to carry the CB trip signal of an external device.
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 1 221 051
MAIN: Inp.asg. mult.sig. 2 221 052
Definition of the function that will be interpreted as a multiple signal (group signal).
5.1.3.2 General Functions
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Design. command C001 200 000
CMD_1: Design. command C002 200 005
CMD_1: Design. command C003 200 010
CMD_1: Design. command C004 200 015
CMD_1: Design. command C005 200 020
CMD_1: Design. command C006 200 025
CMD_1: Design. command C007 200 030
CMD_1: Design. command C008 200 035
CMD_1: Design. command C009 200 040
CMD_1: Design. command C010 200 045
CMD_1: Design. command C011 200 050
CMD_1: Design. command C012 200 055
Selection of the command designation.
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C001 200 002
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C002 200 007
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C003 200 012
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C004 200 017
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C005 200 022
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C006 200 027
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C007 200 032
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C008 200 037
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C009 200 042
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C010 200 047
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C011 200 052
CMD_1: Oper. mode cmd. C012 200 057
Selection of the command operating mode.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-91
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Designat. sig. S001 226 000
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S002 226 008
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S003 226 016
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S004 226 024
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S005 226 032
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S006 226 040
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S007 226 048
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S008 226 056
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S009 226 064
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S010 226 072
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S011 226 080
SIG_1: Designat. sig. S012 226 088
Selection of the signal designation.
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S001 226 001
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S002 226 009
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S003 226 017
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S004 226 025
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S005 226 033
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S006 226 041
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S007 226 049
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S008 226 057
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S009 226 065
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S010 226 073
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S011 226 081
SIG_1: Oper. mode sig. S012 226 089
Selection of the signal operating mode.
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S001 226 003
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S002 226 011
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S003 226 019
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S004 226 027
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S005 226 035
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S006 226 043
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S007 226 051
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S008 226 059
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S009 226 067
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S010 226 075
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S011 226 083
SIG_1: Gr.asg. debounc.S012 226 091
Group assignment for the debouncing time and the chatter suppression.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-92 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S001 226 002
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S002 226 010
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S003 226 018
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S004 226 026
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S005 226 034
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S006 226 042
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S007 226 050
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S008 226 058
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S009 226 066
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S010 226 074
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S011 226 082
SIG_1: Min. sig. dur. S012 226 090
The logic ' 1 ' signal must be available for this minimum time setting so that a telegram can be sent in the "Start/end signal" mode.
5.1.3.3 Setting Groups
Main function MAIN: Vnom prim. end a PSx 019 017 019 057 019 061 019 065
Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end A of the transformer.
MAIN: Vnom prim. end b PSx 019 018 019 058 019 062 019 066
Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end B of the transformer.
MAIN: Vnom prim. end c PSx 019 019 019 059 019 063 019 067
Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end C of the transformer.
MAIN: Vnom prim. end d PSx 019 037 019 060 019 064 019 068
Setting of the primary nominal voltage of end D of the transformer.
5.1.3.4 Control
Main function MAIN: BI active USER 221 003
Selecting the bay interlocking function from the front panel user interface (HMI).
MAIN: SI active USER 221 002
Selecting the station interlocking function from the front panel user interface (HMI).
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.1 221 014
MAIN: Inp.asg. fct.block.2 221 022
Definition of the binary signals assigned to function block 1 and 2.
MAIN: Op. delay fct. block 221 029
Setting the operate delay of the function blocks.
MAIN: CB1 max. oper. cap. 221 084
MAIN: CB2 max. oper. cap. 221 088
Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a limited time period).
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-93
MAIN: CB1 ready fct.assign 221 085
MAIN: CB2 ready fct.assign 221 089
Selecting the event which, when present, will initialize the counter at M A I N : C B 1 a c t . o p e r . c a p . with the value at M A I N : C B 1 m a x . o p e r . c a p .
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Designat. ext. dev. 210 000
DEV02: Designat. ext. dev. 210 050
DEV03: Designat. ext. dev. 210 100
Setting the designation of the respective external device.
DEV01: Op.time switch. dev. 210 004
DEV02: Op.time switch. dev. 210 054
DEV03: Op.time switch. dev. 210 104
Setting the operating time for switchgear (switching device).
DEV01: Latching time 210 005
DEV02: Latching time 210 055
DEV03: Latching time 210 105
Setting the time that a control command is sustained after a switchgear position signal – "Open" or "Closed" – has been received.
DEV01: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 011
DEV02: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 061
DEV03: Gr. assign. debounc. 210 111
Assigning the external device to one of eight groups for debouncing and chatter suppression.
DEV01: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 012
DEV02: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 062
DEV03: Interm. pos. suppr. 210 112
This setting determines whether the 'intermediate position’ signal will be suppressed or not, while the switchgear is operating.
DEV01: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 027
DEV02: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 077
DEV03: Stat.ind.interm.pos. 210 127
This setting determines whether the actual status will be signaled with a 5 s delay after the 'Faulty position' signal is issued.
DEV01: Oper. mode cmd. 210 024
DEV02: Oper. mode cmd. 210 074
DEV03: Oper. mode cmd. 210 124
Select the operating mode of the command from long command, short command or time control.
DEV01: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 014
DEV02: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 064
DEV03: Inp.asg. sw.tr. plug 210 114
Definition of the binary signal used to signal the position (plugged-in / unplugged) of the switch truck plug.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-94 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 021
DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 071
DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.1 210 121
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip command 1” of the protection function. Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
DEV01: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 022
DEV02: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 072
DEV03: With gen. trip cmd.2 210 122
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be opened by “general trip command 2” of the protection function. Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
DEV01: With close cmd./prot 210 023
DEV02: With close cmd./prot 210 073
DEV03: With close cmd./prot 210 123
This setting specifies whether the circuit breaker will be closed by the "close command" of the protection function. Note: This setting is only visible (active) for external devices that are defined as ‘circuit breakers’. This definition is included in the bay type definitions.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 019
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 069
DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctrl.open 210 119
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to move the switchgear unit to the open position. Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be selected.
DEV01: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 020
DEV02: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 070
DEV03: Inp.asg.el.ctr.close 210 120
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used as the control signal to move the switchgear unit to the 'Closed' position. Note: Only signals that are defined in the DEVxx function groups can be selected.
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Open 210 015
DEV02: Inp. asg. end Open 210 065
DEV03: Inp. asg. end Open 210 115
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the 'Open' command.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-95
DEV01: Inp. asg. end Close 210 016
DEV02: Inp. asg. end Close 210 066
DEV03: Inp. asg. end Close 210 116
This setting defines the binary signal that will be used to terminate the 'Close' command.
DEV01: Open w/o stat.interl 210 025
DEV02: Open w/o stat.interl 210 075
DEV03: Open w/o stat.interl 210 125
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Open' position is permitted without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Close w/o stat. int. 210 026
DEV02: Close w/o stat. int. 210 076
DEV03: Close w/o stat. int. 210 126
This setting specifies whether switching to 'Closed' position is permitted without a check by the station interlock function.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 039
DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 089
DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI open 210 139
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'. Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 040
DEV02: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 090
DEV03: Fct.assig.BIwSI clos 210 140
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock with substation interlock'. Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock with station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-96 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 041
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 091
DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI op 210 141
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Open' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'. Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.
DEV01: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 042
DEV02: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 092
DEV03: Fct.asg.BI w/o SI cl 210 142
This setting defines which output will issue the 'Close' enable to the interlocking logic when there is 'bay interlock without substation interlock'. Note:
The interlock conditions for bay interlock without station interlock are included in the bay type definitions (see List of Bay Types in the Appendix). If the interlock condition is to be modified, this is possible by modifying the corresponding Boolean equation in the interlocking logic or by defining a new interlocking logic equation. Only in the latter case is it necessary to change the function assignment.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-97
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 1 250 000
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 2 250 001
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 3 250 002
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 4 250 003
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 5 250 004
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 6 250 005
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 7 250 006
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 8 250 007
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp. 9 250 008
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.10 250 009
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.11 250 010
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.12 250 011
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.13 250 012
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.14 250 013
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.15 250 014
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.16 250 015
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.17 250 016
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.18 250 017
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.19 250 018
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.20 250 019
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.21 250 020
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.22 250 021
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.23 250 022
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.24 250 023
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.25 250 024
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.26 250 025
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.27 250 026
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.28 250 027
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.29 250 028
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.30 250 029
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.31 250 030
ILOCK: Fct.assignm. outp.32 250 031
Definition of the interlock conditions.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-98 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
6 Information and Control Functions
6.1 Healthy
6.1.1 Cyclic Values
6.1.1.1 Physical State Signals
Binary input INP: State U 901 152 144
INP: State U 902 152 147
INP: State U 903 152 150
INP: State U 904 152 153
INP: State U 1001 152 162
INP: State U 1002 152 165
INP: State U 1003 152 168
INP: State U 1004 152 171
INP: State U 1005 152 174
INP: State U 1006 152 177
The state of the binary signal inputs is displayed as follows:
'Without function': No functions are assigned to the binary signal input.
'Low': Not energized.
'High': Energized. This display appears regardless of the binary signal input mode set.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-99
Binary output OUTP: State K 901 150 192
OUTP: State K 902 150 195
OUTP: State K 903 150 198
OUTP: State K 904 150 201
OUTP: State K 905 150 204
OUTP: State K 906 150 207
OUTP: State K 907 150 210
OUTP: State K 908 150 213
OUTP: State K 1001 150 216
OUTP: State K 1002 150 219
OUTP: State K 1003 150 222
OUTP: State K 1004 150 225
OUTP: State K 1005 150 228
OUTP: State K 1006 150 231
OUTP: State K 1007 150 234
OUTP: State K 1008 150 237
The state of the output relays is displayed as follows:
'Without function': No functions are assigned to the output relay. 'Low': The output relay is not energized. 'High': The output relay is energized.
This display appears regardless of the output relay mode set.
6.1.1.2 Logic State Signals
User interface LOC: Loc.acc.block.active 221 005
LOC: Rem.acc.block.active 221 004
Communication interface 1 COMM1: Buffer overrun 221 100
IEC 61850 Communication IEC: Control reservation 221 082 Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device
("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").
Generic Object Oriented Substation Event
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 position 109 005
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 position 109 010
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 position 109 015
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 position 109 020
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 position 109 025
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 position 109 030
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 position 109 035
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 position 109 040
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 position 109 045
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 position 109 050
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 position 109 055
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-100 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 position 109 060
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 position 109 065
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 position 109 070
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 position 109 075
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 position 109 100
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 position 109 105
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 position 109 110
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 position 109 115
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 position 109 120
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 position 109 125
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 position 109 130
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 position 109 135
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 position 109 140
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 position 109 145
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 position 109 150
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 position 109 155
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 position 109 160
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 position 109 165
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 position 109 170
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 position 109 175 State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an
external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 open 109 006
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 open 109 011
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 open 109 016
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 open 109 021
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 open 109 026
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 open 109 031
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 open 109 036
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 open 109 041
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 open 109 046
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 open 109 051
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 open 109 056
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 open 109 061
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 open 109 066
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 open 109 071
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 open 109 076
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 open 109 101
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 open 109 106
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 open 109 111
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 open 109 116
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 open 109 121
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 open 109 126
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 open 109 131
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 open 109 136
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 open 109 141
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 open 109 146
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 open 109 151
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 open 109 156
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 open 109 161
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 open 109 166
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-101
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 open 109 171
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 open 109 176 Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 closed 109 007
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 closed 109 012
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 closed 109 017
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 closed 109 022
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 closed 109 027
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 closed 109 032
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 closed 109 037
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 closed 109 042
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 closed 109 047
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 closed 109 052
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 closed 109 057
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 closed 109 062
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 closed 109 067
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 closed 109 072
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 closed 109 077
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 closed 109 102
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 closed 109 107
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 closed 109 112
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 closed 109 117
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 closed 109 122
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 closed 109 127
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 closed 109 132
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 closed 109 137
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 closed 109 142
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 closed 109 147
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 closed 109 152
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 closed 109 157
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 closed 109 162
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 closed 109 167
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 closed 109 172
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 closed 109 177 Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the
state of an external device.
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003
GOOSE: Ext.Dev02 interm.pos 109 008
GOOSE: Ext.Dev03 interm.pos 109 013
GOOSE: Ext.Dev04 interm.pos 109 018
GOOSE: Ext.Dev05 interm.pos 109 023
GOOSE: Ext.Dev06 interm.pos 109 028
GOOSE: Ext.Dev07 interm.pos 109 033
GOOSE: Ext.Dev08 interm.pos 109 038
GOOSE: Ext.Dev09 interm.pos 109 043
GOOSE: Ext.Dev10 interm.pos 109 048
GOOSE: Ext.Dev11 interm.pos 109 053
GOOSE: Ext.Dev12 interm.pos 109 058
GOOSE: Ext.Dev13 interm.pos 109 063
GOOSE: Ext.Dev14 interm.pos 109 068
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-102 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
GOOSE: Ext.Dev15 interm.pos 109 073
GOOSE: Ext.Dev16 interm.pos 109 078
GOOSE: Ext.Dev17 interm.pos 109 103
GOOSE: Ext.Dev18 interm.pos 109 108
GOOSE: Ext.Dev19 interm.pos 109 113
GOOSE: Ext.Dev20 interm.pos 109 118
GOOSE: Ext.Dev21 interm.pos 109 123
GOOSE: Ext.Dev22 interm.pos 109 128
GOOSE: Ext.Dev23 interm.pos 109 133
GOOSE: Ext.Dev24 interm.pos 109 138
GOOSE: Ext.Dev25 interm.pos 109 143
GOOSE: Ext.Dev26 interm.pos 109 148
GOOSE: Ext.Dev27 interm.pos 109 153
GOOSE: Ext.Dev28 interm.pos 109 158
GOOSE: Ext.Dev29 interm.pos 109 163
GOOSE: Ext.Dev30 interm.pos 109 168
GOOSE: Ext.Dev31 interm.pos 109 173
GOOSE: Ext.Dev32 interm.pos 109 178
GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250 Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input,
representing the state of an external device.
Main function MAIN: CB1 open 3p EXT 031 028
MAIN: CB2 open 3p EXT 031 046
MAIN: CB3 open 3p EXT 031 047
MAIN: CB4 open 3p EXT 031 048
MAIN: CB1 closed 3p EXT 036 051
MAIN: CB2 closed 3p EXT 036 230
MAIN: CB3 closed 3p EXT 036 231
MAIN: CB4 closed 3p EXT 036 232
MAIN: CB1 faulty EXT 221 086
MAIN: CB2 faulty EXT 221 090
MAIN: Enable control 221 058
MAIN: Bay interlock. act. 221 001
MAIN: Subst. interl. act. 221 000
MAIN: Fct. block. 1 active 221 015
MAIN: Fct. block. 2 active 221 023
MAIN: Interlock equ. viol. 221 018
MAIN: CB tripped 221 016
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 active 221 017
MAIN: Mult. sig. 1 stored 221 054
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 active 221 053
MAIN: Mult. sig. 2 stored 221 055
MAIN: Communication error 221 019
MAIN: Cmd. fr. comm.interf 221 101
MAIN: Command from HMI 221 102
MAIN: Cmd. fr. electr.ctrl 221 103
Over-/ Underfrequency Protection
f<>: Reset meas.val. EXT 006 075 Fig.*: 3-83
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-103
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Open signal EXT 210 030
DEV01: Closed signal EXT 210 031
DEV01: Control state 210 018
DEV01: Switch. device open 210 036
DEV01: Switch.device closed 210 037
DEV01: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 038
DEV01: Open command 210 028
DEV01: Close command 210 029
DEV01: Switch. device open 218 000
DEV01: Switch.device closed 218 001
DEV02: Open signal EXT 210 080
DEV02: Closed signal EXT 210 081
DEV02: Control state 210 068
DEV02: Switch. device open 210 086
DEV02: Switch.device closed 210 087
DEV02: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 088
DEV02: Open command 210 078
DEV02: Close command 210 079
DEV02: Switch. device open 218 002
DEV02: Switch.device closed 218 003
DEV03: Open signal EXT 210 130
DEV03: Closed signal EXT 210 131
DEV03: Control state 210 118
DEV03: Switch. device open 210 136
DEV03: Switch.device closed 210 137
DEV03: Dev. interm./flt.pos 210 138
DEV03: Open command 210 128
DEV03: Close command 210 129
DEV03: Switch. device open 218 004
DEV03: Switch.device closed 218 005
Interlocking logic ILOCK: Output 1 250 032
ILOCK: Output 2 250 033
ILOCK: Output 3 250 034
ILOCK: Output 4 250 035
ILOCK: Output 5 250 036
ILOCK: Output 6 250 037
ILOCK: Output 7 250 038
ILOCK: Output 8 250 039
ILOCK: Output 9 250 040
ILOCK: Output 10 250 041
ILOCK: Output 11 250 042
ILOCK: Output 12 250 043
ILOCK: Output 13 250 044
ILOCK: Output 14 250 045
ILOCK: Output 15 250 046
ILOCK: Output 16 250 047
ILOCK: Output 17 250 048
ILOCK: Output 18 250 049
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-104 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
ILOCK: Output 19 250 050
ILOCK: Output 20 250 051
ILOCK: Output 21 250 052
ILOCK: Output 22 250 053
ILOCK: Output 23 250 054
ILOCK: Output 24 250 055
ILOCK: Output 25 250 056
ILOCK: Output 26 250 057
ILOCK: Output 27 250 058
ILOCK: Output 28 250 059
ILOCK: Output 29 250 060
ILOCK: Output 30 250 061
ILOCK: Output 31 250 062
ILOCK: Output 32 250 063
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-105
Single-pole commands CMD_1: Command C001 200 001
CMD_1: Command C002 200 006
CMD_1: Command C003 200 011
CMD_1: Command C004 200 016
CMD_1: Command C005 200 021
CMD_1: Command C006 200 026
CMD_1: Command C007 200 031
CMD_1: Command C008 200 036
CMD_1: Command C009 200 041
CMD_1: Command C010 200 046
CMD_1: Command C011 200 051
CMD_1: Command C012 200 056
Single-pole signals SIG_1: Signal S001 EXT 226 004
SIG_1: Logic signal S001 226 005
SIG_1: Signal S002 EXT 226 012
SIG_1: Logic signal S002 226 013
SIG_1: Signal S003 EXT 226 020
SIG_1: Logic signal S003 226 021
SIG_1: Signal S004 EXT 226 028
SIG_1: Logic signal S004 226 029
SIG_1: Signal S005 EXT 226 036
SIG_1: Logic signal S005 226 037
SIG_1: Signal S006 EXT 226 044
SIG_1: Logic signal S006 226 045
SIG_1: Signal S007 EXT 226 052
SIG_1: Logic signal S007 226 053
SIG_1: Signal S008 EXT 226 060
SIG_1: Logic signal S008 226 061
SIG_1: Signal S009 EXT 226 068
SIG_1: Logic signal S009 226 069
SIG_1: Signal S010 EXT 226 076
SIG_1: Logic signal S010 226 077
SIG_1: Signal S011 EXT 226 084
SIG_1: Logic signal S011 226 085
SIG_1: Signal S012 EXT 226 092
SIG_1: Logic signal S012 226 093
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-106 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110 D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
6.1.2 Control and Testing
Measured data input MEASI: Reset Tmax USER 003 045
Resetting of measured maximum temperatures Tmax and Tmax Tx (x=1...9) to the updated measured values.
Measured data output MEASO: Reset output USER 037 116
Resetting the measured data output function.
f<>: Reset meas.val. USER 003 080 Over-/ Underfrequency Protection Resetting the measured event values f < > : M a x . f r e q u . f o r f > and
f < > : M i n . f r e q u . f o r f < .
6.2 Fault and Event Records
6.2.1 Event Counters
Main function MAIN: CB1 act. oper. cap. 221 087
MAIN: CB2 act. oper. cap. 221 091
Setting the maximum number of CB operations for an ARC cycle (or for a limited time period).
External devices 01 to 03 DEV01: Operation counter 210 043
DEV02: Operation counter 210 093
DEV03: Operation counter 210 143
DEV01: Dev. op. capability 210 003
DEV02: Dev. op. capability 210 053
DEV03: Dev. op. capability 210 103
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-1
Appendix – List of Bay Types (P632, P633 version -620 only) Key
Sorting the Bay Types The bay types are sorted by the criteria listed below. These criteria are encoded in the first three characters of the bay type code (example: A11.100.R01) given in brackets after the Bay Type No. (example: Sorting is first by "Type of bay" in the order given below, then within each group by the second and third character in ascending order.
Type of bay A – Feeder Bay L – Longitudinal Coupler T – Transversal Coupler K – Bus coupler and sectionalizer bay M – Busbar Measurement N – Busbar Grounding X – Other bay type
Number of busbars - Single busbar - Double busbar - Without busbar / other configurations
Equipment - Bays with switch truck or withdrawable switchgear assembly - Bays with two circuit breakers or switch disconnectors on switch trucks or withdrawable switchgear assembly - Bays with stationary switchgear units - Bays with stationary switchgear units and three-position disconnector - Other bay types
Bay Type No.: This number indicates the value to be set at M A I N : T y p e o f b a y (folder "Set/Conf") in order to configure the unit for the selected bay type.
Special Designations for External Devices: Mot.relay: Motor relay Shunt wd. Shunt winding
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-App-2 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Table "Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays"
Column "Switchgear unit" This column begins with the designation for the external device (switchgear unit). The function group follows in brackets. The function group encompasses all setting options for monitoring the switchgear unit and its signals. "Open" and "Close(d)" indicate the signal message or control direction of the switchgear unit.
Column "Binary Input": The "Open" or "Closed" signal should be connected to the binary input U xxxx. The connection points of the binary input U xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. For the P63x in 40TE case, the positions of the binary input boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6 B: Slot 7 C: Slot 8
Column "Output relay" The "Open" or "Close" control of the switchgear unit is effected via output relay K xxxx. The connection points of the output relay K xxxx are shown in the terminal connection diagrams. For the P63X in 40TE case, the positions of the binary output boards are identified as follows: A: Slot 6 B: Slot 7
Table "Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking"
Note: The interlock equations are stored at substation control level, not at unit level.
Symbols used in the Boolean interlock equations: /: Negation 0: Switchgear unit "Open" I: Switchgear unit "Closed" X: Switchgear unit in intermediate position
FctBl1: Function block 1, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 1 (Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")
FctBl2: Function block 2, configuration at M A I N : F c t . a s g . f c t . b l o c k . 2 (Folder "Par/Func/Cont/")
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-3
List of P63x Bay Panel types
Bay type (Identification):
A – Feeder Bay 2 (A11.100.R01) 3 (A11.100.R02) 4 (A11.101.R01) 5 (A11.101.R02) 6 (A11.101.R03) 523 (A11.108.R01) 7 (A11.200.R01) 8 (A11.200.R02) 9 (A11.201.R01) 10 (A11.201.R02) 11 (A11.201.R03) 12 (A11.400.R01) 13 (A11.400.R02) 14 (A11.401.R01) 15 (A11.401.R02) 16 (A11.401.R03) 17 (A11.900.R01) 504 (A11.901.R00) 541 (A13.104.R01) 19 (A13.105.R01) 20 (A13.105.R02) 21 (A13.105.R03) 557 (A13.106.R03) 26 (A13.200.R01) 28 (A13.201.R01) 29 (A13.201.R02) 31 (A13.205.R01) 32 (A13.205.R02) 33 (A13.205.R03) 34 (A13.400.R01) 36 (A13.401.R01) 37 (A13.401.R02) 39 (A13.405.R01) 40 (A13.405.R02) 41 (A13.405.R03) 503 (A13.432.R02) 507 (A13.433.R02) 43 (A15.105.R01) 221 (A15.105.R02) 44 (A15.105.R03) 87 (A23.104.R01) 88 (A23.104.R03) 101 (A23.204.R01) 102 (A23.204.R03) 115 (A23.404.R01) 116 (A23.404.R03)
L – Bus Sectionalizer Bay 133 (L11.100.R01) 553 (L11.100.R01.2) 134 (L11.100.R02) 528 (L11.102.R01) 542 (L11.102.R01.2) 135 (L11.104.R01) 136 (L11.104.R02) 137 (L11.104.R03) 138 (L11.116.R01) 545 (L11.116.R01.2) 139 (L11.116.R03) 148 (L11.200.R01) 149 (L11.202.R01) 150 (L11.202.R03) 164 (L23.901.R02)
T – Bus Coupler Bay 505 (Q21.100.R01) 563 (Q21.133.R01) 205 (Q23.101.R01) 206 (Q23.101.R03)
M – Busbar Measurement Bay 171 (M11.300.R00) 172 (M11.300.R01) 540 (M11.304.R02) 173 (M11.900.R00) 174 (M11.900.R01) 176 (M13.312.R01) 177 (M13.312.R02) 506 (M13.902.R00) 233 (M15.903.R01) 179 (M15.903.R02) 188 (M23.302.R02) 189 (M23.312.R02) 193 (M23.902.R02) 559 (M23.904.R00) 560 (M23.908.R00) 194 (M23.912.R02)
E – Busbar Grounding Bay 130 (E13.901.R01) 132 (E23.903.R02)
X – Other Bay Type 1 (X99.901.R00)
Customized Bay 999 (User)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620
U-App-4 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 2 (A11.100.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-5
Bay Type No. 3 (A11.100.R02) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-6 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 4 (A11.101.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-7
Bay Type No. 5 (A11.101.R02) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-8 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 6 (A11.101.R03) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-9
Bay Type No. 523 (A11.108.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-10 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 7 (A11.200.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-11
Bay Type No. 8 (A11.200.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-12 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 9 (A11.201.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-13
Bay Type No. 10 (A11.201.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-14 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 11 (A11.201.R03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-15
Bay Type No. 12 (A11.400.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-16 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 13 (A11.400.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-17
Bay Type No. 14 (A11.401.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02/ // //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-18 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 15 (A11.401.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-19
Bay Type No. 16 (A11.401.R03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X0=0)
X0 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-20 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 17 (A11.900.R01) Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
X0 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
K A01 K A02
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-21
Bay Type No. 504 (A11.901.R00) Feeder bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
X0 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-22 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 541 (A13.104.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-23
Bay Type No. 19 (A13.105.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-24 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 20 (A13.105.R02) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-25
Bay Type No. 21 (A13.105.R03) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-26 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 557 (A13.106.R03) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q9 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q9 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q9=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q9 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-27
Bay Type No. 26 (A13.200.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
K A01 K A02
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-28 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 28 (A13.201.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-29
Bay Type No. 29 (A13.201.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-30 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 31 (A13.205.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-31
Bay Type No. 32 (A13.205.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-32 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 33 (A13.205.R03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-33
Bay Type No. 34 (A13.400.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U B05
K A01 K A02/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-34 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 36 (A13.401.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-35
Bay Type No. 37 (A13.401.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-36 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 39 (A13.405.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02/ // //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-37
Bay Type No. 40 (A13.405.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-38 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 41 (A13.405.R03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-39
Bay Type No. 503 (A13.432.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-40 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 507 (A13.433.R02) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q8=0) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-41
Bay Type No. 43 (A15.105.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-42 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 221 (A15.105.R02) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-43
Bay Type No. 44 (A15.105.R03) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Q8 Open (Q0=I)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Open (Q8=0)
Close(d) /(Q1=X) & (Q8=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q8 Open (Q0=I)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-44 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 87 (A23.104.R01) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-45
Bay Type No. 88 (A23.104.R03) Feeder bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-46 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 101 (A23.204.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-47
Bay Type No. 102 (A23.204.R03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-48 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 115 (A23.404.R01) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02/ // //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-49
Bay Type No. 116 (A23.404.R03) Feeder bay with switch disconnector / fuse unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q1 (DEV02) Q2 (DEV03) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q1 Open (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q2=0)
Q2 Open (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q1=X) & /(Q2=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-50 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 133 (L11.100.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-51
Bay Type No. 553 (L11.100.R01.2) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-52 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 134 (L11.100.R02) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-53
Bay Type No. 528 (L11.102.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-54 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 542 (L11.102.R01.2) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) Q15 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & (Q15=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-55
Bay Type No. 135 (L11.104.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-56 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 136 (L11.104.R02) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-57
Bay Type No. 137 (L11.104.R03) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) Q8 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X01=0) & (Q8=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q8 Close(d) (X01=0)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-58 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 138 (L11.116.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-59
Bay Type No. 545 (L11.116.R01.2) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-60 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 139 (L11.116.R03) Bus sectionalizer bay with circuit breaker, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
X02 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
X01 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
X02 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-61
Bay Type No. 148 (L13.200.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
K A01 K A02
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-62 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 149 (L13.202.R01) Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) Q16 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-63
Bay Type No. 150 (L13.202.R03) Bus sectionalizer bay with switch disconnector, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) Q16 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q15=I)
Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0) & (Q16=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) (Q15=0) & (Q16=0) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q15 Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q16 Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-64 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 164 (L23.901.R02) Bus sectionalizer bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q11 (DEV01) Q21 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q11 Open (Q11=0)
Close(d) (Q11=I)
Q21 Open (Q21=0)
Close(d) (Q21=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-65
Bay Type No. 505 (Q21.100.R01) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X0=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-66 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 563 (Q21.133.R01) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) X01 (DEV02) X02 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(X01=X) & /(X02=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-67
Bay Type No. 205 (Q23.101.R01) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02/ // /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-68 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 206 (Q23.101.R03) Bus coupler bay with circuit breaker, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q0 (DEV01) Q10 (DEV02) Q20 (DEV03)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U A05 U A06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04K A05 K A06
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q10 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q20 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q0 Close(d) /(Q10=X) & /(Q20=X) & /(FctBl1=I) & /(FctBl2=I)
Q10 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
Q20 Open (Q0=0)
Close(d) (Q0=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-69
Bay Type No. 171 (M11.300.R00) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
X0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U B05
/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-70 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 172 (M11.300.R01) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
X0 (DEV01) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U B05
K A01 K A02/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-71
Bay Type No. 540 (M11.304.R02) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q15 (DEV01) X0 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-72 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 173 (M11.900.R00) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
X0 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-73
Bay Type No. 174 (M11.900.R01) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
X0 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
K A01 K A02
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-74 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 176 (M13.312.R01) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02/ //
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-75
Bay Type No. 177 (M13.312.R02) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01) Q15 (DEV02) F (SIG_1: Signal S011)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-76 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 506 (M13.902.R00) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-77
Bay Type No. 233 (M15.903.R01) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-78 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 179 (M15.903.R02) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01) Q8 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q1 Close(d) (Q8=0)
Q8 Close(d) (Q1=0)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-79
Bay Type No. 188 (M23.302.R02) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05 U B06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-80 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 189 (M23.312.R02) Busbar measurement bay with fuse unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02) F1 (SIG_1: Signal S011) F2 (SIG_1: Signal S012)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04 U B05 U B06
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04/
/
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-81
Bay Type No. 193 (M23.902.R02) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q1 (DEV01) Q2 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-82 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 559 (M23.904.R00) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q15 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-83
Bay Type No. 560 (M23.908.R00) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q25 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
/ /
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-84 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 194 (M23.912.R02) Busbar measurement bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-85
Bay Type No. 130 (E13.901.R01) Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, single busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q15 (DEV01)
Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02
K A01 K A02
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-86 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Bay Type No. 132 (E23.903.R02) Busbar grounding bay with other switchgear unit, double busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Q15 (DEV01) Q25 (DEV02)
Open Close(d) Open Close(d)
U A01 U A02 U A03 U A04
K A01 K A02K A03 K A04
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Q15 Close(d) (Q15=I)
Q25 Close(d) (Q25=I)
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620 U-App-87
Bay Type No. 1 (X99.901.R00) Other bay type with other switchgear unit, without busbar
Assignment of Binary Inputs and Output Relays
Switchgear unit Binary input Output relay
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation without Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
Bay Interlock Equations for Operation with Station Interlocking
Switchgear unit Control O/C Interlock equation
Interlock equations not defined
P631/P632/P633/P634 Changes in software version -610 to -620 (continued)
U-App-88 P63X/EN AD/Ak6 // AFSV.12.10110s D /// P631-306/307/308-611/620 // P632-306/307/308-611/620 // P633-306/307/308-611/620 // P634-306/307/308-611/620
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN AD/Ak6 Version: -611 -620 11/2010
© 2
010
Sch
neid
er E
lect
ric. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.
MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D) Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621 P632 -308 -407/408 -621 P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621 P634 -308 -407/408 -621
Upgrade Documentation
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-3
With these latest versions for the transformer differential protection devices MiCOM P631, P632, P633 and P634 several new features and changes on existing features have been added. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
References Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610
Technical Manual P63X/EN M/Aa4 (AFSV.12.09700 D)
06.06.2008 P631-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620
P632-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620
P633-306/307/308-407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620
P634-306/307/308-405/406/407/408 -611/620
Upgrade Documentation P63X/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-4 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
1 Overview
Version Changes
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software
P631-308-407/408 -620-718
P632-308-407/408 -620-718
P633-308-410/411/412 -620-718
P634-308-407/408 -620-718
Release: 18.09.2008
IEC Bug fixing pertaining to the COMTRADE fault files which a client receives via the IEC 61850 interface: The correct number of binary channels is now entered in the COMTRADE configuration file (*.cfg). In previous versions when, because of the function configuration, n*16 binary information was stored then the number of binary channels was given as n*16+1. Therefore the data stored in the *.cfg and the *.dat files did not match. The automatically generated data file names are now correct with fault numbers exceeding 999. Data file names are issued according to this format: yyyymmdd_HHMMSS_xxx_rNNNN.eee With yyyy = year mm = month dd = day HH = hour MM = minute SS = second xxx = millisecond r = permanent single character NNNN = fault number eee = file extension In previous versions the dot (.) was overwritten for fault numbers exceeding 999.
Stating of 'Control Modes' in the ICD file has been corrected. The IEC data model is not affected by this.
LOC Bug fixing: Using the function where the set password can be made visible on the LC-display by pressing all four arrow keys simultaneously during the start up of the device is now also possible with the new local control panel (with function keys).
PSS Bug fixing: The time tags for the PSS: PS x act ive spontaneous signals (according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and the entry in the operating data memory did not match.
MAIN Bug fixing: In offline operation mode, measured operating values for phase C were not calculated correctly with the 60 Hz nominal frequency.
V<> Bug fixing: After a warm restart the following setting was not active: V < > : t T r a n s i e n t P S x = Blocked.Because of this, the following signals were issued when undervoltage conditions were present:
042 023 V < > : t V < e l a p s . T r a n s i e n t 042 025 V<>: tV<< elapsed t rans.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-5
Version Changes
CBF_1 to CBF_4
The release condition for the function has been dissociated from the drop-out of the internal trip signal. Therefore the sequence will now only be stopped when a loss of load/undercurrent condition has occurred or when the CB signals that its contacts are open.
Bug fixing: The time tags for the C B F _ n : R e a d y spontaneous signals (according to the communications protocol per IEC-60870-5-10x) and the entry in the operating data memory did not match.
Hardware No modifications
Diagram No modifications
Software
P631-308-407/408-621 P632-308-407/408-621 P633-308-410/411/412-621 P634-308-407/408-621
Release: 08.01.2009 Device The device’s capability to detect its hardware state has been
enhanced so that future Ethernet communication and binary modules can be fitted without having to update the software.
The following addresses are now visible: 002 131 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I 002 132 D V I C E : S W v e r s i o n D H M I D M
IEC The processing times for the control and monitoring of switchgear units between the Ethernet communication module and the main CPU have been reduced.
Bug fixing: The standardized model according to WYE class (e.g. 'phsA' instead of 'adphsA') is now applied with the data model for measured values for resultant current forming ('virtual end').
The data object LN_CFG has been extended in logical nodes Dt1NgsPTOC1, Dt2NgsPTOC1, Dt3NgsPTOC1.
Further logical nodes have been added: LN PloGGIO4 to the P631 LN PloGGIO4, IdcGGIO1, RtdGGIO1 to the P633 and P634
The AlmGGIO logical node has been extended by the following signals:
Alm5: 039 127 T H R M 1 : C T A e r r o r Alm6: 039 187 T H R M 2 : C T A e r r o r Alm7: 040 190 M E A S I : P T 1 0 0 o p e n c i r c u i t Alm8: 040 191 M E A S I : Over load 20mA input Alm9: 040 192 M E A S I : Open ci rc. 20mA inp. Alm10: 036 099 C T S : O p e r a t e d ( u p d a t i n g )
The 'Bl.f.' data objects are now available in all nodes: PTOC, PTOV, PTUV, PTTR, PTOF, PTUF, RBRF, PVPH. Because of this, the 'Blocking EXT' condition has been removed from the 'MODE'.
The parameter at address 104 232 I E C : D e a d b a n d V L L has been renamed to I E C : D e a d b a n d V
Since the corresponding measured values are not provided by the P63x, the following addresses have been deleted:
104 233 I E C : D e a d b a n d V P G 104 235 I E C : D e a d b a n d P 104 237 I E C : D e a d b a n d Z 104 239 I E C : D e a d b a n d A S C 104 060 I E C : U p d a t e c y c l e e n e r g y
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-6 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
Version Changes
COMM1 Bug fixing with the use of the MODBUS communication protocol: Faults can now be read out.
MAIN The P633 and P634 now allow disconnection of individual ends by assigning functions to binary signal inputs.
Bug fixing: The measured operating values for the positive sequence currents are now calculated independently of the DTOC/IDMT protection functions.
Display of the following settings has been limited in accordance with the device function. Visible only in the P632/P633 are:
021 017 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 1 o p e n 021 020 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 1 c l o s e d 021 060 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 2 c l o s e d 021 061 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 2 o p e n 006 001 M A I N : D e v i c e s e l e c t i o n k e y 006 002 M A I N : D e v i c e O P E N k e y 006 003 M A I N : D e v i c e C L O S E k e y 006 004 M A I N : L o c a l / R e m o t e k e y
Visible only in the P633 are:
021 062 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 c l o s e d 021 063 M A I N : S i g . a s g . C B 3 o p e n
DIFF The starting condition for the saturation discriminator has been enhanced by the addition of a further minimum condition for the restraining quantity with basic filtering. Without this minimum condition, the saturation discriminator could be incorrectly triggered during the test of a characteristic using virtual test signals in the absence of a preload current.
REF_1 to REF_3
Blocking of the REF functions while the DIFF protection (functional enhancement by -611-715) has been triggered can now be enabled/disabled using setting parameters. Furthermore the R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T binary signal input functions are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, its state is also signaled: R E F _ n : R e a d y (= enabled AND NOT blocked).
REF_1 The function has been enhanced so that further ends can be included into the protection reach, e.g. in ground differential protection for autotransformers.
CBF_1 to CBF_4
As an option, the loss of load/undercurrent criterion can now also be used with the residual current.
The external function startup may now occur either when only the loss of load/undercurrent criterion is applied or also with the CB contact position scanning criterion.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-7
Version Changes
DEV02 to DEV10
Bug fixing: The menu text in the reference language (English) has been corrected for the following signals:
218 002 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e o p e n corrected to: 218 002 D E V 0 2 : O p e n c m d . r e c e i v e d
218 003 D E V 0 2 : S w i t c h . d e v i c e c l o s e d corrected to: 218 003 D E V 0 2 : C l o s e c m d . r e c e i v e d
etc. valid for all devices except DEV01.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-8 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
2 Functional Details
2.1 Main Functions of the P63x (Function Group MAIN)
Disconnecting ends With the P633 and P634, individual ends can now be disconnected when specific protections are applied or for test purposes.
Only one end can be disconnected with the P633. Up to two ends can be disconnected simultaneously with the P634.
If more ends are simultaneously disconnected from the measurement than is permitted, the S F M O N : U n s u f f . n o . o f e n d s alarm is issued and the device is blocked.
Such a disconnection of an end will result in the setting to zero of all current scan values for the relevant phase (phase current and residual current). All functions (e.g. protection functions, limit value monitoring, operating data measurement, etc.) will continue to operate unaffected, with these values set to zero. With the differential protection function the formula to calculate the restraining current is not changed by disconnecting ends, even though only two ends may be left.
Disconnecting ends may only be carried out with binary signal input functions. Starting via operating parameters (or command sent through a communications interface) is not possible.
041 019 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T 041 107 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d B E X T 041 128 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d C E X T 041 129 M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d D E X T
The binary signal input functions listed above must be continuously present when disconnecting ends. To enable the disconnection function, one of the following additional conditions must be met:
All three phase currents at the relevant end must be below 0.05 Inom:
Disconnection of the end will be permanent as soon as (immediately after) the binary signal input function has started and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met.
Disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled as soon as (immediately after) the binary signal input function has ended and this loss of load/undercurrent condition is met.
The P63x will continue to measure any current flow in the disconnected end in order to check this loss of load/undercurrent condition, but will not display these measured values.
The disconnection function, as an alternative to the loss of load/undercurrent condition, can be enabled using another binary signal input function (041 148 M A I N : E n . d i s c . e n d x E X T ) .
As soon as both binary signal input functions are present, disconnection of the end will be effective.
As long as the enabling signal is not present at the binary signal input, there is no status change, i.e. an existing disconnection of an end will remain active independently of the disconnection request.
As soon as the disconnection request ends with the enable signal still present at the binary signal input then the disconnection of the end will be permanently cancelled.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-9
Note As shown in figure 1 both additional conditions are valid independently of each other, i.e. the following sequence is possible and requires appropriate care in the application:
1) The disconnection of an end is enabled by the additional condition: M A I N : E n . d i s c . e n d x E X T .
2) This enabling condition and the disconnection request will end, for instance, with a fault in the triggering circuit.
3) As soon as the measured current value in the disconnected end drops below the 0.05 Inom threshold then the disconnection will be cancelled.
The effective disconnection of an end is signaled by a state signal. 041 149 M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 158 M A I N : E n d B d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 159 M A I N : E n d C d i s c o n n e c t e d 041 168 M A I N : E n d D d i s c o n n e c t e d
The storage of this state is fail-safe. During the device’s initialization after an auxiliary power supply failure, the stored state is compared with the current state of the input functions. If there is a discrepancy (e.g. M A I N : E n d A d i s c o n n e c t e d AND NOT M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T or vice versa) the alarm ( S F M O N : D i s c . E n d x i n v a l i d ) is issued and the device remains blocked. The disconnect condition is then continuously monitored and blocking is cancelled only when the discrepancy has ended. Since the alarm has been stored in the monitoring signal memory, it must be acknowledged by the user.
Setting or resetting the binary signal input is carried out by an internal function, with an operate/reset time-delay of approximately 0.5 s in order to prevent time propagation problems resulting from simultaneously switching on/off the auxiliary power supply and the signal voltage at the binary signal input.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-10 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
64Z6211A_EN
< 0.05 Inom
IA,a
MAIN: En. disc.end x EXT[ 041 148 ]
&
1
1
1S
R
MAIN: End adisconnected[ 041 149 ]
IB,a
IC,a
>1
&MAIN: DisconnectEnd A EXT[ 041 019 ]
MAIN: DisconnectEnd B EXT[ 041 107 ]
MAIN: DisconnectEnd C EXT[ 041 128 ]
MAIN: DisconnectEnd D EXT[ 041 148 ]
&
1
1
1S
R
MAIN: End bdisconnected[ 041 158 ]&
&
1
1
1S
R
MAIN: End cdisconnected[ 041 159 ]&
&
1
1
1S
R
MAIN: End ddisconnected[ 041 168 ]&
< 0.05 Inom
>1
< 0.05 Inom
>1
< 0.05 Inom
>1
SFMON: Unsuff.no. of ends[ 091 010 ]
P633: >1 End disconnectedP634: >2 Ends disconnected
IA,b
IB,b
IC,b
IA,c
IB,c
IC,c
IA,d
IB,d
IC,d
&
&
&
&
U-1 Disconnection logic
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-11
2.2 Ground Differential Protection (Function Groups REF_n)
Blocking ground differential protection
Blocking of the REF_n functions when the DIFF protection (functional enhancement of version -611-715) was triggered may now be enabled/disabled using setting parameters. Furthermore, binary signal input functions (R E F _ n : B l o c k i n g E X T ) are now available to allow for a more flexible application of the functions. Since operational readiness is no longer solely dependent on the device setting, the R E F _ n : R e a d y state is also indicated.
REF_1: Bl.f.DIFFtrigg. PSx[ * ]
0
0: No1: Yes
1
REF_1: Ready[ 019 054 ]
DIFF: Meas.system1 trigg.[ 041 124 ]
DIFF: Meas.system2 trigg.[ 041 125 ]
DIFF: Meas.system3 trigg.[ 041 126 ]
>1
>1
REF_1: BlockingEXT[ 019 051 ]
REF_1: Enabled[ 041 132 ]
PSU: PS x active[ * ]
64Z5300C_EN
REF_1: Generalenable USER[ 019 050 ]
0
0: No1: Yes
1
REF_1: EnablePSx[ * ]
0
0: No1: Yes
1
REF_1: EnablePSx072 141073 141074 141075 141
REF_1: Bl.f.DIFFtrigg. PSx080 006081 006082 006083 006
Parameter
set 1 set 2 set 3 set 4
PSU: PS x active
036 090036 091036 092036 093
x
1234
U-1 Enabling, disabling and readiness of ground differential protection
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-12 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
Protection of autotransformers
Up to now the REF-function could only be applied with the high impedance principle to protect autotransformers (or, in general, electrically-connected multiple end configurations) from internal ground faults. Function group REF_1 has now been enhanced so as to provide a protection function, stabilized by a characteristic, for such protected objects. A typical example with an autotransformer is displayed in the next figure. In this case, the phase currents in ends a and b as well as the neutral-point current must be considered.
Σ(Ix,b)= IN,b
IA,bIB,bIC,b
IA,aIB,aIC,a
Σ(Ix,a)= IN,a
IN,a
U-2 Currents with an autotransformer
For such applications with REF_1, all the other ends (b, c, d – dependent on the type of device) may now be selected, and end a is still permanently included in the protection function.
019 120 R E F _ 1 : A d d . m e a s . i n p . e n d b = Yes / No
019 121 R E F _ 1 : A d d . m e a s . i n p . e n d c = Yes / No
019 122 R E F _ 1 : A d d . m e a s . i n p . e n d d = Yes / No
The neutral-point current is still permanently assigned to the measuring input for end a (T14).
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-13
A further amplitude matching factor is calculated and displayed by the device for each end added.
All currents involved must be referred to a common reference value as this application entails protection of an electric node in a zero-sequence system. This common reference current value is calculated based on the settable reference power and the nominal voltage for end a. This calculation has not been changed from previous versions. The amplitude matching factors then result from the ratio of the primary transformer current values for the relevant end and the common reference current value.
dorc,b,aEndxforI
IkfactormatchingAmplitude
VS
IcurrentferenceRe
ref
x,prim,CT,nomx,amp
a,prim,nom
prim,refref
=
=
⋅=
3
With Sref,prim = 019 031 R E F _ 1 : R e f e r e n c e p o w e r S r e f Vnom,prim,A = 019 017 M A I N : V n o m p r i m . e n d a P S 1 Inom,CT,prim,A = 019 020 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d a Inom,CT,prim,B = 019 021 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d b Inom,CT,prim,C = 019 022 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d c Inom,CT,prim,D = 019 026 M A I N : I n o m C . T . p r i m . , e n d d The reference current and matching factors are displayed at the P63x.
As before, the P63x checks that the reference current and matching factors remain within the permitted ranges. The permitted range for the reference current can be looked up in the S&R-103 setting and recording software. The following rule applies to the matching factors:
The largest matching factor must be ≤ 16.
The value for the second largest matching factor must come to ≥ 0.5.
There are no restrictions concerning further possible matching factors.
Should the P63x calculate a common reference current value or matching factors not satisfying the above conditions then an alarm will be issued and the P63x will automatically be blocked .
The measured values are multiplied by the matching factors and they are then available for further processing. Consequently, all threshold values and measured values always refer back to the relevant reference current rather than to the transformer nominal current or the nominal current of the device.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-14 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
As shown below, the differential current is formed from the sum of all phase currents involved and the neutral-point current:
{ } { } N,aN,ampb,Cb,Bb,Ab,ampa,Ca,Ba,Aa,amp
N,aN,ampb,Nb,ampa,Na,ampN,diff
Ik...)(I,I,IkI,I,Ik
Ik...)(IkIkI
⋅++Σ⋅+Σ⋅=
⋅++⋅+⋅=
The calculation of the restraining current depends on the set operating mode.
If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / sum(IP)', the restraining current is calculated from the sum of all involved ends:
{ } { } ...)(I,I,IkI,I,Ik
...)(IkIkI
b,Cb,Bb,Ab,ampa,Ca,Ba,Aa,amp
b,Nb,ampa,Na,ampN,R
+Σ⋅+Σ⋅=
+⋅+⋅=
If the operating mode is set to 'Low imped. / IP,max', the formula to calculate the restraining current remains unchanged from the application for a single end. But now the highest phase current is calculated from the amplitude-matched sum of the currents on the relevant phase of all ends involved.
{ }( ) )unchanged(IkI,I,ImaxI N,aN,ampCBAN,R ⋅+=21
CorB,Axfor,....)(IkIkIwith b,xb,ampa,xa,ampx =+⋅+⋅=
The value pairs (Id,N/IR,N) calculated with the above formula are then compared with the already identified pick-up characteristics of the ground differential protection function.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-15
2.3 Circuit Breaker Failure Protection (Function Group CBF)
Current flow monitoring The existing line-associated current flow monitoring function has been enhanced by a residual current monitoring function which can be enabled/disabled.
For this either the residual current value measured directly at the CT or the value derived from the three phase currents may be used.
But this choice is only possible when a measuring input for the residual current is available. There is no measuring input for the residual current available with the P631 or for end d on the P634. In these cases, the internally derived value of the residual current is always used, regardless of the setting.
As long as a residual current exceeding the comparator threshold is flowing, the current flow criterion is not met and the corresponding signal (C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N ) is issued. When the residual current monitoring function is disabled, no monitoring is carried out and the C B F _ n : C u r r e n t f l o w N = No signal is issued continuously.
CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
>1
64Z1103C_EN
IA
IB
IC
CBF_1: IN<[ 022 180 ]
CBF_1: Eval-uation IN[ 022 184 ]
0
1
2
0: Without1: Calculated2: Measured C1
c2
+ Σ++
2IN
1 … 2CBF_1: Current flow N[ 038 235 ]
CBF_1: IN
1
>1
CBF_1: Current flow A[ 038 230 ]
CBF_1: Current flow B[ 038 231 ]
CBF_1: Current flow C[ 038 232 ]
CBF_1: Current flowPhx[ 038 233 ]
U-3 Current flow monitoring
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
Ä-16 P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621
Startup The external startup of the circuit breaker failure function (CBF_n) has been modified. The CBF function is always started when there is current flowing during a startup. But, if no current flow is apparent, the CBF function is only started when the external startup has been selected. For this, the selection table for the C B F _ n : F c t . a s s i g n m . C B A u x . setting parameter has been extended and now includes the C B F _ n : S t a r t 3 p E X T signal.
The startup of the circuit breaker failure function by the internal Trip command remains unchanged.
As of version –620, the release condition for the CBF function has been dissociated from the startup condition (internal trip command or external startup). Once started, the CBF function will only drop out when a successful opening has been detected from the current flow monitoring or, in some cases, from the CB contact position signal.
P631/P632/P633/P634 Upgrade Dokumentation (continued)
P63X/EN AD/Am6 // AFSV.12.10310 D /// P631-308-407/408-621 // P632-308-407/408-621 // P633-308-410/411/412-621 // P634-308-407/408-621 U-17
CBF_1: Fct.assignm. CBAux.
[ 022 159 ]
m out of nSignal 1Signal 2Signal n
Selected signals
CBF_1: I<
[ 022 160 ]
IA
CBF_1: CB pos.implausible[ 038 210 ]
INP: Fct.assignm. U xxx
[ xxx yyy ]
U x01
U x02
U x03
U xnn
Address 038 209CBF_1: Startenable EXT[ 038 209 ]CBF_1: Start 3pEXT[ 038 205 ]
CBF_1: Start withman. trip
[ 022 154 ]
0
1
MAIN: Manual tripsignal[ 034 017 ]
MAIN: Trip cmd.blocked[ 021 013 ]
64Z1104D_EN
0: No1: Yes
CBF_1: Startup 3p[ 038 211 ]
IB
IC
CBF_1: Fct.assign. starting
[ 022 202 ]
Gen.trip signal 1
Gen.trip signal 2
Gen.trip signal 3
Gen.trip signal 4
MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 1[ 036 005 ]
MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 2[ 036 023 ]
MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 3[ 036 108 ]
MAIN: Gen. tripsignal 4[ 036 109 ]
&
&
&
&
&&
&
&
&
& & &
>1
1
1
1S
R
&
&
>1
>1
1
1
1S
R
&
>1
CBF: Current flow N[ 038 235 ]
MAIN: CB1 open 3pEXT[ 031 028 ]
MAIN: CB1 closed3p EXT[ 036 051 ]
U-4 Startup of the circuit breaker failure protection
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider Electric
Publication: P63x/EN AD/Am6 Version: -621 11/2010
© 2
010
Sch
neid
er E
lect
ric. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.
MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN AD/An6 (AFSV.12.10620 D)
Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621 P632 -308 -407/408 -621 P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621 P634 -308 -407/408 -621 ⇒ P631 -308 -407/408 -622 ⇒ P632 -308 -407/408 -622 ⇒ P633 -308 -410/411/412 -622 ⇒ P634 -308 -407/408 -622
Upgrade Documentation
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622
In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Devices MiCOM P63x, several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
References Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610
Technical Manual P63x/EN M/Ca4 (AFSV.12.09700 D)
06.06.2008 P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
P632-306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
P633-306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620
P634-306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)
08.01.2009 P631-308-407/408-621 P632-308-407/408-621 P633-308-410/411/412-621 P634-308-407/408-621
Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D)
P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622 3
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622 (continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
Hardware No change P631-308-407/408-621-720 P632-308-407/408-621-720 P633-308-410/411/412-621 -720 P634-308-407/408-621-720
Diagram No change
Release: 29.07.2009 Software DIFF Bug fixing:
It could happen that triggering of the saturation discriminator by an external fault was not reset fast enough when an additional fault had occurred within the same protection zone.
CBF_x Bug fixing:
The associated signal C B F _ x : C u r r e n t f l o w y (y=A, B, C) would sometimes jitter during an open command.
Triggering of the circuit breaker failure protection function would sometimes be delayed. Further delays could sometimes occur with the signals for CBF_1 and CBF_2.
Hardware No change P631-308-407/408-622 P632-308-407/408-622 P633-308-410/411/412-622 P634-308-407/408-622
Diagram No change
Release: 09.02.2011 Software PC The following menu point has been removed:
P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183) Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW implementation. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
4 P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -622 (continued)
P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622 5
Version Changes COMM1,
COMM2 The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161) and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default. Notes: These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding this will be truncated. The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
IEC Bug fixing: The implementation of the IEC 61850 signals RBRFn and the IEC 61850 modeling of IN in the Logical Nodes MMXU and MSQ has been modified so that it matches other MiCOM Px3x protection devices.
MAIN Bug fixing: Settings for daylight saving time were reset after a warm restart.
LED, MAIN, SFMON, REF_3, CBF_4
The designation texts of the following data points have been changed, but their functionality remains unchanged. The left side shows the old designation and the right side shows the new designation. R E F _ 3 : R e s t r a i n . c u r r . R E F _ 3 ⇒R E F _ 3 : R e s t r a i n . c u r r . R E F _ 3
The English designation texts of the following data points have been changed, but their functionality remains unchanged. The old designation is shown on the left and the new designation on the right hand side. L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 2 r o t ⇒ L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 2 r e d S F M O N : U n s u f f . n o . o f e n d s ⇒ S F M O N : U n s u f f . N o . o f e n d s P634 only: C B F _ 4 : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b e l ⇒ C B F _ 4 : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e P631, P632, P633, P634: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T ⇒ M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d a E X T P632, P633, P634 only: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d B E X T ⇒ M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d b E X T P633, P634 only: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d C E X T ⇒ M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d c E X T P634 only: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d D E X T ⇒ M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d d E X T similar for M A I N : E n d x d i s c o n n e c t e d (old: x=A,B,C,D; new: x=a,b,c,d)
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2
011
Sch
neid
er E
lect
ric. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider ElectricPublication: P63x/EN AD/An6 // AFSV.12.10620 D /// P631-308-407/408-622 // P632-308-407/408-622 // 06/2011 P633-308-410/411/412-622 // P634-308-407/408-622
MiCOM P631/P632/P633/P634 Transformer Differential Protection Devices
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 (AFSV.12.10630 D)
Version P631 -308 -407/408 -621 P632 -308 -407/408 -621 P633 -308 -410/411/412 -621 P634 -308 -407/408 -621 ⇒ P631 -308 -407/408 -630 ⇒ P632 -308 -407/408 -630 ⇒ P633 -308 -410/411/412 -630 ⇒ P634 -308 -407/408 -630
Upgrade Documentation
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630
In the new versions of the Transformer Differential Protection Devices MiCOM P63x, several enhanced features and changes on existing features have been included. These are described with reference to the documentation listed below:
References Released Version Documentation
01.03.2006 P631-304-403/404-610 P632-304-403/404-610 P633-304-404/405/406-610 P634-304-403/404-610
Technical Manual P63x/EN M/Ca4 (AFSV.12.09701 D)
06.06.2008 P631 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
P632 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
P633 -306/307/308 -407/408/409/410/411/412 -611/620
P634 -306/307/308 -405/406/407/408 -611/620
Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Ak6 (AFSV.12.10110 D)
08.01.2009 P631-308-407/408-621 P632-308-407/408-621 P633-308-410/411/412-621 P634-308-407/408-621
Upgrade Documentation P63x/EN AD/Am6 (AFSV.12.10310 D)
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 3
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
1 Overview
Version Changes
Hardware No change P631-308-407/408-621-720 P632-308-407/408-621-720 P633-308-410/411/412-621 -720 P634-308-407/408-621-720
Diagram No change
Release: 29.07.2009 Software DIFF Bug fixing:
It could happen that triggering of the saturation discriminator by an external fault was not reset fast enough when an additional fault had occurred within the same protection zone.
CBF_x Bug fixing:
□ The associated signal C B F _ x : C u r r e n t f l o w y (y=A, B, C) would sometimes jitter during an open command.
□ Triggering of the circuit breaker failure protection function would sometimes be delayed. Further delays could sometimes occur with the signals of CBF_1 and CBF_2.
Hardware No change P631-308-407/408-630 P632-308-407/408-630 P633-308-410/411/412-630 P634-308-407/408-630
Diagram No change
Release: 09.02.2011 Software
DVICE The new data point (008 233) D V I C E : S W v e r s . C h i n . D H M I D M is a purely internal version number (for the order option "Chinese display").
Bug fixing: Display problems with the Fault Panel are resolved.
IEC GOOSE
Phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communications protocol has been implemented. See section "Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)" for a detailed description of the numerous function enhancements carried out.
IEC Bug fixing: The implementation of the IEC 61850 signals RBRFn and the IEC 61850 modeling of IN in the Logical Nodes MMXU and MSQ has been modified so that it matches other MiCOM Px3x protection devices.
PC The following menu point has been removed: P C : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 183) Note: Compatibility even with older versions of the operating program continues to be guaranteed.
COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : - 1 0 3 p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 178) may now be used to select between the 103 protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the VDEW implementation. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
4 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Version Changes COMM1 The data point C O M M 1 : M O D B U S p r o t . v a r i a n t (003 214) may
now be used to select between the MODBUS protocol variants Private and Compatible. The protocol variant Compatible corresponds to the MODBUS implementation in the MiCOM Px20 and Px40 protection devices. The protocol variant Private corresponds to the first implementation of the MODBUS protocol. Note: As before this setting is hidden unless the MODBUS protocol is enabled.
COMM1 (P632 & P633 only)
Communications protocol IEC 60870-5-103: When checking during test operations it is now possible to trigger signals (SIG) and contact positions (DEV) from the control part (previously only possible from the protection part).
These new addresses were added:
Oper/CtrlTest/COMM1
(221 105) C O M M 1 : S e l . p o s . d e v . t e s t – Not assigned – DEV01 to DEV03
(221 106) C O M M 1 : T e s t p o s i t i o n d e v . – don't execute – execute open – execute close – execute intermed.
COMM1, COMM2
The menu points C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (003 161) and C O M M 2 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r (103 161) can no longer be set by using a selection list but, for reasons of compatibility, they may now be defined as free text. The default is SE but, in individual cases, it may become necessary to enter texts differing from the default. Notes: These parameters can only be set using the operating program and it is not possible to set them locally using the integrated local control panel (HMI). The maximum text length is 8 characters and designations exceeding this will be truncated. The parameter C O M M 1 : N a m e o f m a n u f a c t u r e r is hidden unless an IEC 60870-5 protocol is enabled.
MAIN New logic state signal:
Clock synchronization: The parameter: M A I N : T i m e s y n c h r o n i z e d (009 109) shows whether an external clock synchronization had been carried out. This signal is reset after 10 minutes.
Bug fixing: Settings for daylight saving time were reset after a warm restart.
V/f The setting range for V / f : t a t V / f = 1 . 0 5 P S x has been extended: Previously: 1.0 s to 1000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s, Now: 1.0 s to 6000.0 s in steps of 0.1 s.
Similarly, the setting range for V / f : R e s e t t i m e P S x has been extended: Previously: 0 s to 10000 s in steps of 1 s, Now: 0 s to 60000 s in steps of 1 s.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 5
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Version Changes DEVxx Device identifiers can now be edited.
In the "Designat. ext. dev." parameters the 'Device Name User' setting should be selected. Then the text for the device's name, entered by the user at each of the "DEV-Name User" parameters, will be used as the device’s designation. The maximum number of 4 characters was not changed from the previous permanent default setting.
Parameters (DEV01/DEV02/DEV03):
D E V x x : D E V - N a m e U s e r (218 101, 218 102, 218 103)
LED, MAIN, SFMON, CTS, REF_3, CBF_4
The designation text of the following data point has been changed, but the functionality remains unchanged. The left side shows the old designation and the right side shows the new designation. C T S : R e s e t l a t c h i n g E X T ⇒ C T S : R e s e t l a t c h . E X T The designation texts of the following data points have been changed. The old designation is shown on the left and the new designation on the right hand side. L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 2 r o t ⇒ L E D : F c t . a s s i g . H 1 2 r e d S F M O N : U n s u f f . n o . o f e n d s ⇒ S F M O N : U n s u f f . N o . o f e n d s P634 only: C B F _ 4 : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b e l ⇒ C B F _ 4 : C B p o s . i m p l a u s i b l e P631, P632, P633, P634: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d A E X T ⇒ M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d a E X TP632, P633, P634 only: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d B E X T ⇒M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d b E X TP633, P634 only: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d C E X T ⇒M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d c E X TP634 only: M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d D E X T ⇒M A I N : D i s c o n n e c t E n d d E X Tsimilar for M A I N : E n d x d i s c o n n e c t e d (old: x=A,B,C,D; new: x=a,b,c,d)
6 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Version Changes As the interlock conditions are also transmitted together with reporting in
the newly implemented phase 2 of the IEC 61850 communication protocol (see above), it is now a requirement that these interlock conditions are cyclically checked and not, as before, only with the request for a switching operation. Therefore this new parameter has been introduced: (221 104) I L O C K : C y c l e t i n t e r l . c h e c k The cycle time (range from 100 ms to 10 s) is set here, after which a check of the interlock conditions is carried out. As additional processor capacity must be provided for each of these checks it must be ensured that a favorable compromise is found for the cycle time setting value. On the one hand it is desirable to select a cycle time value which is as short as possible so that changes in the interlock conditions are updated without any notable delays, but on the other hand this cycle time value should not be so short that the P63x system will be under too much strain. As the P63x CPU load is dependent on the total number of function groups having been configured it is not possible to suggest a generally acceptable cycle time value.
ILOCK (P632 & P633 only)
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 7
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
2 Functional Details
2.1 Communication Interface IEC 61850 (Function Group IEC)
As a further option the device is provided with the interface protocol according to the Ethernet based communication standard IEC 61850. As of firmware version P63x -630 the implementation and configuration of the IEC communication interface are now different from previous design versions.
IEC 61850 IEC 61850 was created jointly by users and manufacturers as an international standard. The main target of IEC 61850 is interoperability of devices. This includes the capability for two or more intelligent electronic devices (IED), manufactured by the same company or different companies, to exchange data for combined operation.
This communication standard IEC 61850 has now created an open and common basis for communication from the process control level down to the network control level, for the exchange of signals, data, measured values and commands.
For a standardized description of all information and services available in a field device a data model, which lists all visible functions, is created. Such a data model, specifically created for each device, is used as a basis for an exchange of data between the devices and all process control installations interested in such information. In order to facilitate engineering at the process control level a standardized description file of the device, based on XML, is created with the help of the data model. This file can be imported and processed further by the relevant configuration program used by the process control device. This makes possible an automated creation of process variables, substations and signal images.
The following documentation providing the description of the IEC 61850 data model used with this unit is available:
An XML-based IDC file in the SCL (Substation Configuration Description Language) with a description of data, properties and services, available from the unit, that are to be imported into the configuration tool "IED Configurator” or into a system configurator.
A PICS_MICS_ADL file with the following contents:
PICS (Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available services.
MICS (Model Implementation Conformance Statement) with an overview of available object types.
ADL (Address Assignment List) with an overview of the assignment of parameter addresses (signals, measuring values, commands, etc.) used by the device with the device data model as per IEC 61850.
8 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Ethernet Module The optional Ethernet module provides an RJ45 connection and a fiber optic interface where an Ethernet network can be connected. The selection of which of the two interfaces is to be used to connect to the Ethernet network is made by setting the parameter [IC]: Media.
Note: Setting parameters from the IEC function group and identified by "[ IC]: . . . " provide information only. They are set with the "IED Configurator", but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program.
There are two ordering variants available for the fiber-optic interface: the ST connector and the SC connector both for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm (a third variant ST connector for 100 Mbit/s and 1300 nm is pending). The RJ45 connector supports 10 Mbit/s and 100 Mbit/s.
The optional Ethernet module additionally provides an RS485 interface for remote access with the MiCOM S1 operating program (function group COMM2).
Notes: The unit may be equipped with the optional Ethernet module only as an alternative to the standard optional communication module. Therefore the Ethernet-based communication protocol IEC 61850 is available only as an alternative to function group COMM1.
Configuration and enabling
The IEC function group can be included in the configuration by setting the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. After having included the parameter I E C : F u n c t i o n g r o u p I E C in the configuration the parameter I E C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R and the parameters for internal clock tracking are visible and freely configurable.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting I E C : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R .
The setting parameters from the IEC function group as well as the related function groups GOOSE and GSSE are not automatically active in the unit. The unit features two memory "banks" one of which includes the active setting parameters. The other memory bank is used with the configuration procedure for parameters from the IED Configurator and the operating system. Specific project-related extensions of the IEC 61850 parameters from the IED Configurator are loaded into the unit by downloading a .MCL file. The inactive communication parameters are activated by executing the command I E C : S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k . This command may also be issued from the IED Configurator.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 9
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
U-1 Configuration according to IEC 61850-6
10 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
IED
Processor module
IEC 61850 parameters separate from protection device parameters!
New approach to IED parameter management
Control PC
Parameter download
Parameter upload
Operating program
IEDConfigurator
Deviceparameters
Ethernet module
IEC 61850parameter
Bank 1 Bank 2
Bank switching to enable the device parameters
Parameter switch
IEC 61850parameter
19Z7002A_EN U-2 Saving configuration parameters
Client Log-on Communication in Ethernet no longer occurs in a restrictive master slave system, as is common with other protocols. Instead, server or client functionalities, as defined in the 'Abstract Communication Service Interface' (ACSI, IEC 61870-7-2), are assigned to the devices. A 'server' is always that unit which provides information to other units. A client may log on to this server in order to receive information, for instance 'reports'. In its function as server the unit can supply up to 16 clients, linked into the network, with spontaneous or cyclic information.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 11
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Clock Synchronization With IEC 61850 clock synchronization is effected via the SNTP protocol, defined as standard for Ethernet. Here the unit functions as an SNTP client.
For clock synchronization one can choose between the operating modes Anycast from SNTP Server or Request from Server. With the first operating mode synchronization occurs by a broadcast message sent from the SNTP server to all units in the network, and in the second operating mode the unit requests a unit-specific time signal during a settable cycle.
Two SNTP servers may be set. In this case, clock synchronization is preferably performed by the first server. The second server is reverted to only if no signal is received from the first server.
When looking at the source priority for clock synchronization, which is set at the MAIN function then, by selecting "COMM1/IEC", synchronization per IEC 61850 is automatically active but only if this communication protocol is applied.
Generating datasets, reporting
The specific project related feature of the unit’s communications behavior is determined by the configuration of datasets, reports and high priority transmission methods. A piece of information must be included in a dataset so as to be transmitted as a signal. A dataset is a list to transmit certain data objects. The selection of data objects and the resulting length of the dataset are determined by the application; merely the maximum size of a dataset to be transmitted by GOOSE (see next section) is limited to 1500 bytes. Data objects provided by the unit are available for selection with a structure as specified by IEC 61850. Within the quality descriptor for each piece of information the invalid bit and the test bit are served according to the unit’s state; the other attributes are not set. Any number of datasets may be created with the IED Configurator. Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. The knowledge of dataset content is imperative for decoding and evaluating received signals. Configuration files possess a listing of all datasets with a description of all data objects included.
Next to their use with high priority transmission methods (see following section) datasets are used mainly for reporting. The unit provides up to sixteen unbuffered reports and eight buffered reports independent of the number of clients logged-on. Management is arranged into sixteen Unbuffered Report Control Blocks (urcbA to urcbP) and eight Buffered Report Control Blocks (brcbA to brcbH). Whereas with unbuffered reporting pieces of information may be lost during a communications failure, the buffered report control blocks support a buffered transmission which is required for the uninterrupted writing of events. A pre-defined dataset may be assigned to each report which will then determine which data object will be transmitted with the relevant report. Assigning datasets is not limited; the same dataset may be referenced in various reports or even in GOOSEs.
The unit can serve up to sixteen clients. Each client can log-on to any number of available reports, but one report is always allocated exclusively to only one client. The client is then able to activate the wanted report for himself and to set the transmission behavior to his requirements. The system concept with intended clients must be taken into account when datasets are assigned to the reports.
Reports are not received by the unit.
12 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Transmitting modeled signals not provided by the IEC 61850 data model
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 16 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be transmitted via reporting. A selection of state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting I E C : S i g G G I O 1 s e l e c t i o n . The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the sequence given for the ‘m out of n’ selection for the state signals. The indexes SigGGIO1.ST.ind1 to SigGGIO1.ST.ind16 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects.
Single commands Single commands (e.g. short command, long command, persistent command) are configured with the operating program. Sending commands to the unit can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the unit. But only one command at a time is carried out. The operating mode Direct control with normal security is provided for single commands.
Control and monitoring of switchgear units
Configuration of control of switchgear devices for the IEC 61850 is only possible with the IED Configurator.
Control of switchgear devices can be carried out from all clients that have previously logged-on to the unit. Only one control command is executed at a time, i.e. further control requests issued by other clients during the execution of such a command are rejected. The following operating modes [ I C ] : c t l M o d e l are available to control external devices by clients and they can be individually set for each switchgear device:
Status only
Direct control with enhanced security
SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security
When set to the operating mode Select before operate the switchgear unit is selected by the client before the control command is issued. Because of this selection the switchgear unit is reserved for the client. Control requests issued by other clients are rejected. If after a selection no control command is issued by the client the unit resets this selection after a settable timeout period [ IC]: sboTimeout (default: 2 minutes) has elapsed.
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary units among themselves is setup with GOOSE. For further details see description of function group GOOSE.
The switchgear device’s contact positions are signaled to the clients with the reports.
Fault transmission Including fault transmission for IEC 61850 in the configuration is possible only with the IED Configurator.
Transmission of fault files is supported per "File Transfer". COMTRADE fault files in the unit are transmitted uniformly either as ASCII or binary formatted files. Fault transmission can be cancelled from the configuration.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 13
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
High priority transmission of information
Whereas normal server-client services are transmitted at the MMS and TCP/IP level the high priority transmission of information is carried out directly at Ethernet level. Furthermore messages in such a particular form can be received by all participants in the relevant sub-network, independent of their server or client function. They are deployed in instances where high-speed transmission of information is wanted between two or more devices. Applications, for example, are reverse interlocking, transfer trip or decentralized substation interlock.
The IEC 61850 standard provides two modes for high priority transmission of information: the GSSE and the GOOSE. The GSSE (also named UCA2-GOOSE) is used to transmit binary information with a simple configuration by 'bit pairs', and it is compatible with UCA2. The GOOSE enables transmission of all data formats available in the data model, such as binary information, integer values, two-pole contact position signals or analog measured values. The unit supports receipt and evaluation of GOOSE including binary information and two-pole contact position signals from external devices.
Communication with the MiCOM S1 operating program via the Ethernet interface
Direct access by the MiCOM S1 operating program via the Ethernet interface on the device may occur through the "tunneling principle". Transmission is carried out by an Ethernet Standard Protocol, but this is supported only by the associated MiCOM S1 operating program (specific manufacturer solution). Such transmission is accomplished over the same hardware for the network, which is used for server-client communication. Available are all the familiar functions offered by the MiCOM S1 operating program such as reading/writing of setting parameters or retrieving stored data.
14 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Function group IEC presents the following parameters, measured values and signals:
Parameters listed in italic letters provide information only. They are set with
the IEC 61850 configuration tool "IED Configurator", but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program.
Configuration parameters in the operating program
IEC: Function group IEC 056 059
Cancelling function group IEC or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
IEC: General enable USER 104 000
Enabling and disabling function group IEC. IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k 104 043
This parameter can only be sent individually. Accepting the previously set communication parameters as the active communication settings.
IEC: Active Config. Name 104 045
Name of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: Active Config. Vers. 104 046
Version number of the configuration bank currently valid. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: Inact. Config. Name 104 047
Name of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: Inact. Config. Vers. 104 048
Version number of the inactive configuration bank. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
IEC: IED name 104 057
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the Logical Device Name. Setting is carried out with the IED Configurator.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 15
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
IEC: IP address 104 001
IP address of the unit set for the server function in the system. Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was used to set the IP address. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: IP Address.
IEC: Subnet mask 104 005
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network. Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was used to set the sub-network. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: SubNet Mask.
IEC: Gateway address 104 011
This parameter shows the IPv4 address of the network gateway for communication links to clients outside of the local network. Note: With software versions previous to P63x -630 this parameter was used to set the network gateway. Now it is only an information parameter ('read only'), for which a value can be set by using the "IED configurator" with Communications: Gateway Address.
IEC: SNTP server 1 IP 104 202
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization. IEC: SNTP server 2 IP 104 202
IP address of the backup server used for clock synchronization IEC: SigGGIO1 selection 104 064
Optional signal assignment for a transmission per communication protocol IEC 61850 based on the selection table of the binary inputs (opto coupler inputs).
IEC: Diff. local time 104 206
Time difference between UTC and local time at the unit’s substation. IEC: Diff. dayl.sav. time 104 207
Time difference of the daylight saving time to standard time. IEC: Switch.dayl.sav.time 104 219
This setting defines whether an automatic switching to daylight saving time is wanted.
IEC: Dayl.sav.time start 104 220
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. d 104 221
IEC: Dayl.sav.time st. m 104 222
These three parameters define the date for switching from standard time over to daylight saving time. By combining the three parameters I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t a r t (values "first", "second", "third", "fourth", "last"), I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . d (seven weekdays) and I E C : D a y l . s a v . t i m e s t . m (month) a setting, for example, such as "on the last Sunday in March" can be carried out.
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.st.0:00 + 104 223
Time period in minutes after midnight when daylight saving time is switched to standard time. If for example the clock is advanced one hour from 2:00 AM to 3:00 AM the parameter I E C : D a y l . s a v . t . s t . 0 : 0 0 + is set to 120 (minutes).
16 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end 104 225
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end d 104 226
IEC: Dayl.sav.time end m 104 227
IEC: Dayl.sav.t.end 0:00+ 104 228
These parameters define the date and time of day for the clock changeover from daylight saving time to standard time. Settings are made similar to the changeover to daylight saving time.
Parameter, unit identification DVICE: MAC address module A 104 061
MAC address for the network hardware of the Ethernet module. This address is set during manufacture and can only be read.
Function parameters associated with IEC 61850, general function
COUNT: Iec61850 pulsQty 221 096
Setting the scaling factor for the count value’s transmission via IEC 61850. According to the standard the resulting value is calculated as: Value transmitted = updated value * pulsQty.
Operation, cyclic values, logic state signals
IEC: Comm. link faulty 105 180
Display when an Ethernet module is not operational, i.e. if the MAC address is missing or there is an implausible parameter setting.
IEC: Control reservation 221 082
Display if a client has made a reservation to control an external device ("select" for control by control mode "select before operate").
Configuration parameters in the IED Configurator
IED Details: SCL File ID
Identification of the .mcl configuration file. The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, entering a bay name.
IED Details: SCL File Version
Specific value to identify the IEC 61850 data model and configuration. The preset value may be changed on demand by, for example, identifying the revision states during engineering.
IED Details: Name
Explicitly assigned unit name for the function in the system (IED); is part of the Logical Device Name.
Further specific values listed in the column "Template Details" only provide
information. They are preset and cannot be modified.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 17
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Communications: Connected Sub-Network
Optional name available to identify the Ethernet. Communications: Access Point
Part of the communications control; preset, cannot be modified. Communications: IP Address
Explicitly assigned IP address of the unit for the server function in the system.
Communications: SubNet Mask
The subnet mask defines which part of the IP address is addressed by the sub-network and which part by the device that is logged-on to the network.
Communications: Gateway Address
This parameter defines the IPv4 address of the network gateway for communication links to clients outside of the local network.
Communications: Media
Network hardware provided as fiber optics or twisted pair copper wires. Communications: TCP Keepalive
Communication monitoring at TCP level; preset. Communications: Database Lock Timeout
Return time period for setting procedures that have commenced; preset. SNTP: Poll Rate (seconds)
Polling interval for clock synchronization; preset. SNTP: Accepted Stratum level
Quality criterion to accept an SNTP server for clock synchronization; preset, cannot be modified.
SNTP: IP Address
IP address of the preferred server used for clock synchronization. SNTP: virtual key "Use Anycast"
Appointing any server in the local network to provide clock synchronization.
Further specific values listed in the column "External server parameters" may be accepted when imported from an XML configuration file.
Dataset Definitions: Name
Explicitly assigned name for the dataset. Dataset Definitions: Location
Saving datasets at System\LLN0 is compulsory. Dataset Definitions: Contents
Content (data objects, data attributes) of a dataset Dataset Definitions: Display “GOOSE Capacity”
Checking the length of a dataset for less than 1500 bytes to permit transmission in GOOSE messages. The display is irrelevant when the dataset is only used in reports.
18 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Report Control Blocks: Report Type
Report type Unbuffered updating
Buffered saving
Report Control Blocks: Report ID
Report ID consisting of the Device Name and the Report Control Block. Report Control Blocks: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the report. Report Control Blocks: Configuration Revision
Revision status of the configuration. Controls: ctlModel
To control external devices the following operating modes can be set: Status only
manually operated switching device
Direct control with enhanced security direct command issue with extended monitoring of command effecting
SBO (Select before operate) with enhanced security switching device selection procedure with extended monitoring of command effecting
Controls: sboTimeout
Return time period after selection without having issued a command. Controls: Uniqueness of Control: Multicast MAC Address
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset. Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Application ID (hex)
ID-number of the GOOSE. Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device. Controls, Uniqueness of Control: GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device. Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device. Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Configuration Revision
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device. Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Data Obj Index
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 19
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Controls, Uniqueness of Control: Default Input Value
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed: False Default: not set
True Default: set
Last Known Value Default: retain last value received
Double Point: Intermediate (00) Default: switching device in intermediate position
Double Point: Off (01) Default: switching device open
Double Point: On (10) Default: switching device closed
Double Point: Bad state (11) Default: switching device in intermediate position
Measurements: Unit multiplier
Multiplication factor; not supported. Measurements: Scaled measurement range Min
Lower measuring range limit value; not supported. Measurements: Scaled measurement range Max
Upper measuring range limit value; not supported. Measurements: Deadband
Multiplier for the smallest display value of the measured value. In order to have the current measured value sent when it has changed from the value last sent the result of the set dead band value multiplied by the smallest display value must exceed the smallest display value.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.measCyc: Value
Transmission of measured values: Time interval in seconds between two dead band evaluations.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.enCyc: Value
Cyclic transmission of measured values without dead band check: Time interval in seconds between transmissions of two energy count values.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.comtrade: Value
Transmission of COMTRADE fault files formatted either as ASCII or binary files.
Configurable Data Attributes: Mod.distExtr: Value
Cancelling fault transmission or including it in the configuration.
Further specific values listed in the column "Data type” only provide information. They are preset and cannot be modified.
20 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
2.2 Generic Object Oriented Substation Event (Function Group GOOSE)
For high priority exchange of information between individual units (IEDs) in a local network, the unit provides the function group GOOSE as defined in the standard IEC 61850. GOOSE features high-speed and secure transmission of information for reverse interlocking, decentralized substation interlock, trip commands, blocking, enabling, contact position signals and other signals.
GOOSE messages are only transmitted by switches but not by routers. GOOSE messages therefore remain in the local network to which the unit is connected.
Configuration and enabling
Function group GOOSE can be configured using the parameter G O O S E : F u n c t i o n g r o u p G O O S E . This parameter is visible only if the optional Ethernet communication module is fitted to the device. Once the GOOSE is configured, all parameters associated to this function group are then visible and settable.
Further setting parameters from function group GOOSE are set with the IED Configurator, but they cannot be modified from the local control panel (HMI) or with the operating program.
The function can then be enabled or disabled by setting G O O S E : G e n e r a l e n a b l e U S E R .
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 21
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
» »Device A Device B
GOOSE: Input 1 ... 32
S1 Studio
GOOSE: Output 1 ... 32
S1 Studio System/GosGGIO2IEC 61850
Mapping
System/LLN0/gcb01 ... 08
System/LLN0/Datasetx
System/GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 ... 32
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
System/GosGGIO1
MCL
Pos1.stVal ... Pos32.stVal
System/DevGosGGIO3
Ext.Dev 1 … 32
S1 Studio
19Z7003A_EN
IED Configurator
IED ConfiguratorIED Configurator
IED Configurator
Fixed assignment
U-3 GOOSE configuration
22 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Sending GOOSE The unit can send up to eight different GOOSE messages that are managed in eight GOOSE Control Blocks (gcb01 to gcb08). Information content depends on the respective dataset assigned to GOOSE. The maximum size of a dataset to be sent by GOOSE is limited to 1500 bytes. A control display is shown by the IED Configurator to check this limit.
When defining the datasets for GOOSE it is advised to select the individual data attributes and not the overlapping data objects. By this the amount of data is kept within a limit and decoding is guaranteed on the receiving end.
In addition to the information included in the IEC 61850 data model an optional number of up to 32 signals can be selected from all the signals available in the unit to be transmitted via GOOSE, as it is also possible with reporting. Selection of binary state signals (shuttling to communications) is made by setting G O O S E : O u t p u t n f c t . a s s i g . (n = 1 to 32). The data object indexes defined for SigGGIO1 must follow the function assignments for the GOOSE outputs. The indexes GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 may then be included in the datasets just as the other data objects.
When a state change occurs with a selected state signal or a measured value changes which is greater than the dead band set for the relevant data point then the complete GOOSE is sent. There will be multiple send repetitions at ascending time periods. The first send repetition occurs at the given cycle time set with the parameter [ I C ] : M i n i m u m C y c l e T i m e . The cycles for the following send repetitions result from a conditional equation with the increment set with the parameter [ I C ] : I n c r e m e n t . Should no further state changes occur up to the time when the maximum cycle time has elapsed [ IC]: Maximum Cycle Time, then GOOSE will be sent cyclically at intervals as set for the maximum cycle time.
In order to have unambiguous identification of a GOOSE sent, characteristics such as [ IC]: Mult icast MAC Address, [ IC]: Appl icat ion ID (hex), [ IC]: VLAN Ident i f ier (hex), [ IC]: VLAN Pr ior i ty and [ IC]: GOOSE Identi f ier must be entered in the IED Configurator settings. Further characteristics are [ IC]: Dataset Reference and [ IC]: Configurat ion Revis ion.
Each GOOSE is given the state change index and the number of send repetitions.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 23
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Receiving GOOSE With GOOSE up to 32 logic binary state signals as well as 32 two-pole contact position signals from external devices (Ext.Devxx) can be received. For each state signal or contact position signal to be received a specific GOOSE message is to be selected, which will contain the information wanted, by setting [ IC]: Mult icast MAC Address, [ IC]: Appl icat ion ID (hex), [ IC]: Source Path, [ IC]: GOOSE Ident i f ier and [ IC] : DataSet Reference. With the further setting of [ IC]: Data Obj Index / Type, which corresponds to the GOOSE position index and the information structure of the sending unit, the required information from the chosen GOOSE will be selected. The identification features "VLAN identifier" and [ I C ] : C o n f i g u r a t i o n R e v i s i o n that are also included in the GOOSE received will not be evaluated.
These parameters characterizing the information may be taken either from unit or project planning documentation of the sending unit or from a configuration file which is conform to IEC 61850. The IED Configurator will support the import of .IID, .SCD and .MCL files when the "browse function" (virtual key) is applied. The selection and acceptance of parameters from an existing project planning is distinguished by a simplified and very reliable data input.
Should the data type of the selected data object provide quality information then this can be evaluated. When activating [ I C ] : Q u a l i t y O b j I n d e x, the distance of the quality descriptor to the data object (if not preset) must be given as well as the quality criterion, which is to be tested. A signal is rejected when one of the bits ([ IC]: Inval id i ty Qual i ty b i ts , see displayed bar with bit state) is received as a set bit. These parameters are usually described in a configuration file and are accepted from there during an import action.
Each GOOSE includes time information on the duration of validity of its information. This corresponds to the double time period to the next GOOSE repetition. If the duration of validity has elapsed without this GOOSE having been received again (e.g. because of a fault in communications), the received signals will automatically be set to their respective default values [ I C ] : D e f a u l t I n p u t V a l u e . Which of the possible state values will set the desired security grade depends on the relevant application.
The following configuration (shuttling to the device functions) of the logic state signals received from the logic node GosGGIO1 (G O O S E : I n p u t n f c t . a s s i g . , where n = 1 to 32) is based on the selection table of the binary inputs, identical to that of the opto-coupler inputs. Contact position signals received from external devices (LN: DevGosGGIO3) are listed in the selection table for interlocking equations of the function group ILOCK, which are available to design a decentralized substation interlock.
The virtual key "Unmap" may be used to remove the link of a binary signal input to an external data point. In such a case all entries for this binary signal input are deleted.
24 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Uniqueness of control within a system
If with a system application it must be ensured that only one control command at a time is being processed system wide ("uniqueness") then interlocking of secondary units among themselves is setup with GOOSE. The unit sets the status information Control/LLN0.ST.OrdRun.stVal. when it has received a control command. This information - stored in a dataset – is distributed in the system by GOOSE and is therefore available to all other units as an interlocking condition. The state information is reset and accordingly signaled after termination of the command sequence.
The unit is capable to monitor the command status of up to 32 further units. With the IED Configurator OrdRunGGIO1.ind1.stVal to OrdRunGGIO1.ind32.stVal are configured in a similar way to the other GOOSE inputs. A shuttling to the interlocking equations is not necessary as their consideration within command checking is automatically enabled when the first binary signal input is configured. During a signaling receipt phase command execution will be rejected.
U-4 Uniqueness of Control
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 25
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
The function group GOOSE presents the following parameters, measured values and signals:
Configuration parameters in the operating program
GOOSE: Function group GOOSE 056 068
Cancelling function group GOOSE or including it in the configuration. If the function group is cancelled from the configuration, then all associated settings and signals are hidden.
Parameters included in this function group are only effective when function group IEC is configured and enabled and when the parameters in this function group have been activated by setting the parameter IEC: S w i t c h C o n f i g . B a n k .
GOOSE: General enable USER 106 001
Enabling and disabling function group GOOSE. GOOSE: Output 1 fct.assig. 106 011
GOOSE: Output 2 fct.assig. 106 013
GOOSE: Output 3 fct.assig. 106 015
GOOSE: Output 4 fct.assig. 106 017
GOOSE: Output 5 fct.assig. 106 019
GOOSE: Output 6 fct.assig. 106 021
GOOSE: Output 7 fct.assig. 106 023
GOOSE: Output 8 fct.assig. 106 025
GOOSE: Output 9 fct.assig. 106 027
GOOSE: Output 10 fct.assig. 106 029
GOOSE: Output 11 fct.assig. 106 031
GOOSE: Output 12 fct.assig. 106 033
GOOSE: Output 13 fct.assig. 106 035
GOOSE: Output 14 fct.assig. 106 037
GOOSE: Output 15 fct.assig. 106 039
GOOSE: Output 16 fct.assig. 106 041
GOOSE: Output 17 fct.assig. 106 043
GOOSE: Output 18 fct.assig. 106 045
GOOSE: Output 19 fct.assig. 106 047
GOOSE: Output 20 fct.assig. 106 049
GOOSE: Output 21 fct.assig. 106 051
GOOSE: Output 22 fct.assig. 106 053
GOOSE: Output 23 fct.assig. 106 055
GOOSE: Output 24 fct.assig. 106 057
GOOSE: Output 25 fct.assig. 106 059
GOOSE: Output 26 fct.assig. 106 061
GOOSE: Output 27 fct.assig. 106 063
GOOSE: Output 28 fct.assig. 106 065
GOOSE: Output 29 fct.assig. 106 067
GOOSE: Output 30 fct.assig. 106 069
GOOSE: Output 31 fct.assig. 106 071
GOOSE: Output 32 fct.assig. 106 073
Function assignment of a binary logical state signal to the virtual GOOSE outputs. Signals configured here can be included as GosGGIO2.ST.ind1 to GosGGIO2.ST.ind32 in the datasets.
26 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 fct.assig. 107 006
GOOSE: Input 2 fct.assig. 107 016
GOOSE: Input 3 fct.assig. 107 026
GOOSE: Input 4 fct.assig. 107 036
GOOSE: Input 5 fct.assig. 107 046
GOOSE: Input 6 fct.assig. 107 056
GOOSE: Input 7 fct.assig. 107 066
GOOSE: Input 8 fct.assig. 107 076
GOOSE: Input 9 fct.assig. 107 086
GOOSE: Input 10 fct.assig. 107 096
GOOSE: Input 11 fct.assig. 107 106
GOOSE: Input 12 fct.assig. 107 116
GOOSE: Input 13 fct.assig. 107 126
GOOSE: Input 14 fct.assig. 107 136
GOOSE: Input 15 fct.assig. 107 146
GOOSE: Input 16 fct.assig. 107 156
GOOSE: Input 17 fct.assig. 107 157
GOOSE: Input 18 fct.assig. 107 158
GOOSE: Input 19 fct.assig. 107 159
GOOSE: Input 20 fct.assig. 107 160
GOOSE: Input 21 fct.assig. 107 161
GOOSE: Input 22 fct.assig. 107 162
GOOSE: Input 23 fct.assig. 107 163
GOOSE: Input 24 fct.assig. 107 164
GOOSE: Input 25 fct.assig. 107 165
GOOSE: Input 26 fct.assig. 107 166
GOOSE: Input 27 fct.assig. 107 167
GOOSE: Input 28 fct.assig. 107 168
GOOSE: Input 29 fct.assig. 107 169
GOOSE: Input 30 fct.assig. 107 170
GOOSE: Input 31 fct.assig. 107 171
GOOSE: Input 32 fct.assig. 107 172
Function assignment of the virtual binary GOOSE inputs (GosGGIO1\Pos1.stVal to GosGGIO1\Pos32.stVal) to a binary logical state signal on the unit so that they can be processed further by the protection, control or logic functions. Signals configured here contain the received and pre-processed state of data attributes configured for GOOSE receipt.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 27
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Physical state signals GOOSE: Output 1 state 106 010
GOOSE: Output 2 state 106 012
GOOSE: Output 3 state 106 014
GOOSE: Output 4 state 106 016
GOOSE: Output 5 state 106 018
GOOSE: Output 6 state 106 020
GOOSE: Output 7 state 106 022
GOOSE: Output 8 state 106 024
GOOSE: Output 9 state 106 026
GOOSE: Output 10 state 106 028
GOOSE: Output 11 state 106 030
GOOSE: Output 12 state 106 032
GOOSE: Output 13 state 106 034
GOOSE: Output 14 state 106 036
GOOSE: Output 15 state 106 038
GOOSE: Output 16 state 106 040
GOOSE: Output 17 state 106 042
GOOSE: Output 18 state 106 044
GOOSE: Output 19 state 106 046
GOOSE: Output 20 state 106 048
GOOSE: Output 21 state 106 050
GOOSE: Output 22 state 106 052
GOOSE: Output 23 state 106 054
GOOSE: Output 24 state 106 056
GOOSE: Output 25 state 106 058
GOOSE: Output 26 state 106 060
GOOSE: Output 27 state 106 062
GOOSE: Output 28 state 106 064
GOOSE: Output 29 state 106 066
GOOSE: Output 30 state 106 068
GOOSE: Output 31 state 106 070
GOOSE: Output 32 state 106 072
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE output state.
28 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
GOOSE: Input 1 state 106 200
GOOSE: Input 2 state 106 201
GOOSE: Input 3 state 106 202
GOOSE: Input 4 state 106 203
GOOSE: Input 5 state 106 204
GOOSE: Input 6 state 106 205
GOOSE: Input 7 state 106 206
GOOSE: Input 8 state 106 207
GOOSE: Input 9 state 106 208
GOOSE: Input 10 state 106 209
GOOSE: Input 11 state 106 210
GOOSE: Input 12 state 106 211
GOOSE: Input 13 state 106 212
GOOSE: Input 14 state 106 213
GOOSE: Input 15 state 106 214
GOOSE: Input 16 state 106 215
GOOSE: Input 17 state 106 216
GOOSE: Input 18 state 106 217
GOOSE: Input 19 state 106 218
GOOSE: Input 20 state 106 219
GOOSE: Input 21 state 106 220
GOOSE: Input 22 state 106 221
GOOSE: Input 23 state 106 222
GOOSE: Input 24 state 106 223
GOOSE: Input 25 state 106 224
GOOSE: Input 26 state 106 225
GOOSE: Input 27 state 106 226
GOOSE: Input 28 state 106 227
GOOSE: Input 29 state 106 228
GOOSE: Input 30 state 106 229
GOOSE: Input 31 state 106 230
GOOSE: Input 32 state 106 231
Display of the virtual binary GOOSE input state.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 29
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Logic state signals GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 position 109 000
State of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 000,109 005…109 175 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 open 109 001
Binary open state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 001,109 006…109 176 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 closed 109 002
Binary closed state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 002,109 007…109 177 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: Ext.Dev01 interm.pos 109 003
Binary intermediate position state of the virtual two-pole GOOSE input, representing the state of an external device.
(Addresses 109 003,109 008…109 178 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: IED01 link faulty 107 180
Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured signal is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal.
(Addresses 107 180…107 215 for IED01 to IED32.)
GOOSE: ExtDev01 link faulty 107 216
Display whether GOOSE receipt of the configured external device is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal.
(Addresses 107 216…107 247 for the external devices DEV01 to DEV32.)
GOOSE: IED link faulty 107 250
Display that appears as soon as receipt of at least one of the configured GOOSEs is faulty or not available. To each GOOSE the GOOSE sending device will attach a validity stamp, up to which a repetition of GOOSE will be carried out independently of a change of state. Thus the unit monitors the time interval before the reception of the next state signal.
30 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
Configuration parameters in the IED Configurator
GOOSE Publishing: Multicast MAC Address
Virtual MAC address that the sending unit provides as the destination; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Application ID (hex)
Explicitly assigned ID number of the GOOSE. GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Identifier (hex)
ID number of the virtual LAN with which the GOOSE is sent; preset. GOOSE Publishing: VLAN Priority
Priority with which the GOOSE is sent in the virtual LAN; preset. GOOSE Publishing: Minimum Cycle Time
First send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Maximum Cycle Time
Continuous send repetition of the GOOSE occurring after the set time period; preset.
GOOSE Publishing: Increment
Specification factor for the transition of time intervals for GOOSE send repetitions from the first to the continuous repetition.
GOOSE Publishing: GOOSE Identifier
GOOSE ID consisting of the Device Name and the GOOSE Control Block. GOOSE Publishing: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE. GOOSE Publishing: Configuration Revision
Revision status of the configuration.
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 31
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
GOOSE Subscribing: Multicast MAC Address
Virtual MAC address used as a receive filter; preset. GOOSE Subscribing: Application ID (hex)
ID-number of the GOOSE. GOOSE Subscribing: Source Path
Information data attribute in the transmitting device. GOOSE Subscribing: GOOSE Identifier
ID of the GOOSE in the transmitting device. GOOSE Subscribing: Dataset Reference
Name of the dataset assigned to the GOOSE in the transmitting device. GOOSE Subscribing: Configuration Revision
Configuration revision status of the transmitting device. GOOSE Subscribing: Data Obj Index
Position index of the data object within the GOOSE. GOOSE Subscribing: Data Type
Structure of the data object; possible settings:
Unknown Unknown Boolean Boolean Int8 Integer, 8 bits (binary digits) Int16 Integer, 16 bits (binary digits) Int32 Integer, 32 bits (binary digits) UInt8 Positive integer, 8 bits (binary digits) UInt16 Positive integer, 16 bits (binary digits) UInt32 Positive integer, 32 bits (binary digits) Float Floating-point number BStr2 Binary state, 2 bits SPS Single-pole signal DPS Two-pole signal
GOOSE Subscribing: Quality Obj Index
Distance of the quality descriptor to the data object if not preset. The quality of the received information is to be tested if such has been configured.
32 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
P63x, Changes in software version -621 to -630 (continued)
GOOSE Subscribing: Invalidity Quality bits
Quality criterion, which is to be tested.
Invalid / Questionable Invalid / questionable Source Information source is faulty Relay test Sending unit is set to test mode OperatorBlocked Blocked by operator
and
Overflow Measured value has exceeded its capacity OutofRange Measured value has exceeded its range BadReference Referenced value is faulty Oscillatory Value is volatile Failure Faulty OldData Information is out-of-date Inconsistent Information is unreliable Inaccurate Information is inaccurate
GOOSE Subscribing: Evaluation Expression
Criteria to check the received information content by comparing it with a set integer value; the parameter is not supported in the unit.
Equal to Compared to: equal Not equal to Compared to: unequal Greater than Compared to: greater Less than Compared to: less Pass through Do not compare
GOOSE Subscribing: Default Input Value
Default value for the information in case GOOSE receipt has failed False Default: not set True Default: set Last Known Value Default: retain last value received Double Point: intermediate (00) Default: switching device in
intermediate position Double Point: Off (01) Default: switching device open Double Point: On (10) Default: switching device closed Double Point: Bad state (11) Default: switching device in
intermediate position
P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 33
34 P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2
011
Sch
neid
er E
lect
ric. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider ElectricPublication: P63x/EN AD/Aq6 // AFSV.12.10630 D /// P631-308-407/408-630 // P632-308-407/408-630 // P633-308-410/411/412-630 // P634-308-407/408-630 06/2011
Schneider Electric 35 rue Joseph Monier 92506 Rueil-Malmaison FRANCE
Phone: +33 (0) 1 41 29 70 00 Fax: +33 (0) 1 41 29 71 00 www.schneider-electric.com Publishing: Schneider ElectricPublication: P63x/EN M/Aq6 Version: -610 -611 -620 -621 -622 -630, Volume 2 06/2011
Customer Care Centre
http://www.schneider-electric.com/CCC
© 2
011
Sch
neid
er E
lect
ric. A
ll rig
hts
rese
rved
.